Home

&Scaron;KODA Superb Owner`s Manual

1. Practical features 73 Boot 82 Variable loading floor in the boot 88 Extending variable load floor with integrated aluminium strips and fasteners Superb Combi 89 Net partition Superb Combi 92 Roof rack system 93 The air conditioning system 95 Heating ventilation and cooling 95 Air conditioning system manual air conditioning system 97 Climatronic automatic air conditioning system 100 Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventilation 103 Communication and multimedia 106 General information 106 Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ____ 109 Universal telephone preinstallation GSM III _ 112 Wi Fi 116 Voice control 120 Multimedia 124 Driving Starting off and Driving 128 Steering 128 Starting and stopping the engine using the key 129 Starting and stopping the engine KESSY _____ 131 Braking 134 Manual gear changing and pedals 136 Automatic transmission 136 Running in 140 Economical driving and environmental sustainability 140 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 144 Driving abroad 145 Assist systems Brake assist systems Parking aid Park assist Cruise control system START STOP Fatigue detection break recommendation Towing a trailer Towing device Trailer Safety Passive Safety General information Correct seated position Seat belts Using seat belts Inertia reels and belt tensioners Airbag s
2. HE WARNING Continued a Never use a damaged vehicle battery risk of explosion Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery risk of explosion and chemical burns a Replace a frozen vehicle battery a Never jump start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels risk of ex plosion and chemical burns FI warnine a When you charge a battery hydrogen is released and a highly explosive gas mixture is also produced An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on a Creating a bridge between the poles on the battery e g with a metal object or cable creates a short circuit risk of melting the lead bars and risk of ex plosion battery fire and acid splashes a Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices Strong sparking represents a risk of injury Before carrying out any work on the electrical system switch off the engine the ignition and all of the electrical components and disconnect the negative terminal on the battery CAUTION a The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off otherwise the vehicle s electrical system electronic components can be dam aged When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system first disconnect the battery s negative terminal followed by the positive terminal a When connecting the battery to the electrical system fir
3. Fig 9 gt lt j Recommended gear a ws v This chapter contains information on the following subjects B oT e Select Information 23 n Information overview gt gt z bs g Memory 24 iy ef 21 Warning against excessive speeds 25 The multifunction display only operates if the ignition is switched on After the ig nition is switched on the function displayed is the one which you last selected Co First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn before switching off the ignition ings H on page 22 The multi function display can be shown in the segment display as well as in the The currently engaged gear A is shown in the instrument cluster display Fig 9 information display page 10 In order to minimise the fuel consumption a recommendation for shifting into an On vehicles with an information display there is an option to fade out some of other gear is indicated in the display the information gt If the system recognises that it is beneficial to change gear an arrow B is shown in the display The arrow points up or down depending on whether you should shift into a higher or lower gear 22 Using the system EJ WARNING a Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature dis play that there is no ice on the road E
4. The following values of the selected memory are set to zero gt Average fuel consumption gt Distance driven gt Average speed gt Driving time Single trip memory memory 1 The single trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the ig nition is switched on until it is switched off New data will also flow into the cal culation of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours the memory is automatically erased Total trip memory memory 2 The total trip memory collates the data from any number of individual trips up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 1999 km distance or for vehicles with infor mation display 99 hours and 59 minutes or 9999 km distance The memory is de leted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation starts all over again Unlike the single trip memory the total trip memory is not deleted after a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours Note All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is dis connected 1 If no value is set the output value 30 km h is automatically displayed Warning against excessive speeds First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary gt Press button A Fig 10 on page 23 or turn th
5. 1 13 pin power socket Safety eyelet Mounting recess Cap Dust cap Tow ball Operating lever Lock cap Release pin Key Locking ball i Note If you lose the key please get in touch with a specialist garage EN SHC Se EES Adjusting the ready position Fig 143 Setting the ready position ready position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 160 Always adjust the ball head in the ready position before fitting gt Turn the key 1 so that its red marking is visible Fig 143 gt Grip the tow bar below the protective cap 2 gt Press the release pin 3 in the direction of the arrow to the stop and simulta neously push the lever 4 downwards in the direction of the arrow to the stop The lever remains locked in this position CAUTION In the ready position the key cannot be removed nor turned to a different posi tion Fitting the tow bar Fig 144 Insert the ball head lock the lock and put the lock cover on First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 160 gt Pull cap 4 Fig 142 on page 160 downwards gt Put the tow bar in the ready position page 161 gt Grip the tow bar from underneath Fig 144 and insert into the mounting re cess until you hear it click into place H The lever 1 automatically turns upwards and the release pin 2 pops out its red and green parts are visi
6. Assume control of the steering Complete the parking procedure without using the system ASR intervention Please take over steering The parking procedure is terminated by a TCS intervention PARK ASSIST Turn on turn signal and select reverse gear The prerequisites for manoeuvring out of a parking space using the system have been met Switch on the turn signals and shift into reverse Please take over steering and drive on The manoeuvring procedure out of a parallel parking space has ended Assume control of the steering Automatic space departure not possible Space too small The manoeuvring procedure using the system is not possible The parking gap is too small Park Assist Brake interv Speed too high The driving speed during the parking procedure was too high automatic brake assist is initiated CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Activating deactivating 155 Storing and maintaining speed __ 55S Changing the stored speed 156 Temporarily deactivating 156 The Cruise Control System CCS maintains a set speed more than 25 km h with out you having to actuate the accelerator pedal This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking power of the engine The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the cruise control system is switched on FJ warnine For safety reasons the cruise c
7. Folding gt Press the cover in the handle area in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 90 and the cover automatically rolls up into position 1 Press in the grip area again and the cover will roll up Removing inserting The fully rolled up boot cover can be removed e g for the transport of bulky ob jects gt Push on the side of the crossbar in the direction of the arrow 4 Fig 90 and remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 5 Insertion takes place in the reverse order E warnine No objects should be placed on the foldable boot cover Automatic Retractable cargo cover Superb Combi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 The automatic rolling up of the foldable boot cover enables an easier entry into the boot gt Open the boot lid The foldable boot cover rolls up automatically in the position 1 to Fig 90 on page 86 gt Push the cover in the area of the handle in the direction of the arrow 3 The cover retracts completely When the boot lid is opened quickly the automatic rolling up of the foldable boot cover is blocked for a delay time of approx 2 seconds The function to automatically roll up the foldable boot cover can be activated de activated via the information display in the menu Settings Autom blind Side compartments in the boot Fig 91 Superb boot Open side compartment left right Fig 92 Superb Combi
8. It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling ef fect Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air condi tioning system page 99 or for Climatronic page 102 FJ warnine For your own safety and that of other road users ensure that all the windows are free of ice snow and misting Please familiarize yourself about how to cor rectly operate the heating and ventilation systems how to demist and defrost the windows as well as with the cooling mode LI CAUTION a The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free e g of ice snow or leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air con ditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle This is not a leak i Note a The used air streams out through the vents in the boot a We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the in terior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning sys tem This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is oper ating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense re placement of compressor The air conditioning system 95 Air outlets Fig 108 Air vents at the rear First read and observ
9. EJ warninec Rapid acceleration particularly on slippery roads can lead to loss of control of the vehicle risk of accident Operational faults First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 136 Emergency programme The transmission switches to the emergency programme if there is a fault in sys tem of the automatic gearbox Indications of an activated emergency programme include the following gt Only certain gears are selected gt The reverse gear R cannot be used gt Shifting gears in Tiptronic mode is not possible Gearbox overheating The gearbox may for example become too hot due to frequent repeated starting or stop and go traffic Overheating is indicated by the warning light page 12 Clutches of the automatic gearbox are too hot ii Defective selector lever lock If the selector lever lock is defective or its power supply is interrupted e g dis charged vehicle battery faulty fuse the selector lever can no longer be moved out of position P in the normal manner and the vehicle can no longer be driven The selector lever must be unlocked specially page 234 Note If the gearbox has switched to the emergency programme visit a specialist ga rage Starting off and Driving 139 This chapter contains information on the following subjects New engine _ gt MoO New tyres 140 New brake pads 1408 AR First read and observe the introductory info
10. Fig 121 gt Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position with regard to the height and forward back position gt Push the lever upwards to the stop Power steering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 128 The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force It is still fully possible to steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the en gine is not running e g when towing However greater physical effort is re quired to turn the steering wheel CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Electronic immobiliser 130 Ignition lock 130 Starting the engine 130 Switching off the engine __ ST Starting and stopping the engine on vehicles with the KESSY system page 34 The engine can only be started using a correctly coded original key The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after Starting the cold engine This is quite normal and is not an operating problem F WARNING When leaving the vehicle the ignition must always be removed This is par ticularly important if children are left in the vehicle Children could otherwise start the engine for example risk of accident or injury a Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The ex haust gases from the engine contain substances such as odourless and col ourless carbon monoxide a p
11. Storing in memory of remote control key 68 Ventilated front seats 70 Seats and useful equipment _ 65 Adjusting the seats 65 Selector lever See Selector lever operation 137 Selector lever operation 137 Service 97 Service display TI Setting Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventila tion 104 Manual air conditioning 99 Steering wheel 129 Setting the clock Clock TR Shelves 73 Side airbag 179 Side compartments inthe boot _ 387 Side compartments in the boot with battery _ _ 88 Sliding tilting roof Closing 44 Closing the sun screen Superb Combi 46 Closing Superb Combi 46 Emergency 235 Opening closing the sun screen Superb Combi _ 46 Opening and closing 44 Opening and tilting Superb Combi 46 Operation 44 Operation Superb Combi 46 see Electric sliding tilting roof 44 Snow chains 220 Socket 12 V 77 Spare wheel 218 Speedometer 9 Speed symbol See Wheels 217 Spoiler 197 START STOP 156 Manually activating deactivating the system __ 158 Starting shutting down the engine 157 System operating conditions 157 Starting and stopping the engine KESSY 131 Starting and stopping the engine using the key _ 129 Starting the engine Jump starting 229 Key 130 see KESSY 133 START STOP Information messages 158 Jump starting 229 Steering force assistance 129 St
12. CAUTION A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle e g damage to gearbox or points out general risks of an accident SA For the sake of the environment An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects This is where you will for example find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consump tion i Note A normal Note draws your attention to important information about the operation of your vehicle You have opted for a SKODA our sincere thanks for your confidence in us You have received a vehicle with the latest technology and range of amenities Please read this Owner s Manual carefully because the operation in accordance with these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle If you have any questions about your vehicle please contact a KODA Partner We hope you enjoy driving your SKODA and wish you a pleasant journey at all times Your SKODA AUTO ass hereinafter referred to only as SKODA or manufacturer On board literature The on board literature for your vehicle consists of this owner s manual as well as a service schedule and the Help on the road brochure Depending on the vehicle model and equipment other additional operating man uals and instructions may be provided e g an operating manual for the radio If one of the documents listed above is missing please contact a SKODA Partner Terms used Th
13. Fuses and light bulbs 237 Fuses in the dash panel Fig 201 Fuse box cover Schematic diagram of the fuse box First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 237 The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind a cover Replacing fuses gt Remove the cover of the fuse box Fig 201 gt Replace the appropriate fuse gt Re insert the cover of the fuse box Fuse assignment in the dash panel Power consumer Diagnostic socket engine control unit fuel pump relay fuel pump control unit gt ABS control unit ESC switch for tyre pressure warning brake sensor for START STOP coil of the starter relay only 3 Switch and airbag control unit WIV tail lights dimming mirrors pressure sensor telephone preinstal T lation Control unit for headlight beam adjustment and headlight swivel con 5 trol unit for parking aid control unit for park assist 5 Instrument cluster control unit for electromechanical power steering selector lever lock power supply for data bus AG 7 Heated opening of the crankcase ventilation air flow meter 8 Control unit for trailer detection 238 Do it yourself Power consumer Relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation 10 Adaptive left main headlight 11 Adaptive right main headlight 12 Not assigned 1
14. If a temperature higher than 26 C is selected a red symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale At both end positions Climatronic functions at maximum cooling heating output and the temperature is not regulated CAUTION Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold Recirculation AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 100 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognised by the air quality sensor recirculated air mode will temporarily be switched off If the concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal level the air distribu tion control is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into the vehicle interior In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior When the automatic air distribution control is switched on an air quality sensor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air Switching recirculated air mode on gt Repeatedly press the button until the indicator light on the left side of the button is i
15. If the steering lock is not then unlocked the following message is shown in the instrument cluster display for 10 seconds O Steering wheel still locked Eliminate the possible cause which is preventing the unlocking and then repeat the attempt to unlock the steering Switching on the ignition First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 131 The steering must be unlocked to switch on the ignition gt Briefly press the starter button Fig 123 on page 132 and the ignition is switch ed on If the ignition is switched on and the driver s door is opened the following mes Sage appears in the instrument cluster display Switch off ignition Starting the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 131 Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system The glow plug warning light oo illuminates after the ignition has been switched on Start the engine after the warning light oo has gone out You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating pe riod otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position P or N and firmly apply the handbrake gt Depress and hold the clutch pedal vehicles with a manual gearbox or brake pedal vehicles with an automatic gearbox un
16. Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 125 4200 350 1750 2500 4 1968 Performances Superb MG6 Superb DSG6 Superb DSG6 4x4 Superb Combi MG6 Superb Combi DSG6 Superb DSG6 4x4 Top speed km h 228 222 219 226 221 218 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 8 6 8 6 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 8 Permissible trailer load braked kg Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 2000 2000 Technical data 251 Multi purpose vehicles AF Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 245 Engine Maximum permissible gross weight kg 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI Map 2032 DSG7 MG6 4x4 2073 2152 DSG6 2105 DSG6 4x4 2267 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI 2 0 1 147 kW FSI 3 6 1 191 kW FSI 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI MG6 CR 2077 2084 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI MG6 MG6 4x4 CR 2097 2174 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI MG6 DSG6 4x4 CR 2105 2199 a GreenLine 252 Technical data A Abroad Driving abroad 145 Unleaded petrol 145 ABS Operation 148 Warning lighte 17 Accessories 196 Adaptive headlights AFS 5I Adjusting External mirrors 64 Interior mirror 63 Seats 65 Adjusting the seats 65 168 Adjustment Headlight beam gt gt gt 4 amp 8 Headrests gt
17. This means it is necessary to remove the dirt Underbody protection First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 190 The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechani cal influences It is not possible to guarantee that the protective coating will not suffer any damage as the vehicle is driven We recommend having the protective coating underneath the vehicle and the chassis checked preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of winter Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 193 EI warnine Never use additional underbody protection or anti corrosion agents for ex haust pipes catalytic converters diesel particle filters or heat shields When the engine reaches its operating temperature these substances may ignite risk of fire CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Natural leather 194 Artificial leather fabric and Alcantara 195 Seat covers 195 Seat belts 196 Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle We recommend using vehicle care products from SKODA Original Accessories These are available from SKODA Partners The usage instructions on the package must be observed EI WARNING a Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions a Always store vehicle care products safely in parti
18. a Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving only when the vehicle is stationary 8 Using the system Overview She SO SNI i bet y 1 min x 100 4 Z y A a an Z g0 v2 ic Ar 1 n X a a Nv Fig 2 Instrument cluster O 2 3 llls Nle First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 Revolutions counter with warning lights page 9 Speedometer with warning lights page 9 Button for display mode gt Setting the hours minutes gt Activating deactivating the second speed in mph or km h gt Service intervals Display of the number of days and kilometres remaining until the next service Coolant temperature gauge page 9 Display With counter for distance driven page 10 With service interval display page 11 With digital clock page 12 With multifunction display page 22 With information system page 22 Fuel gauge page 10 Button for gt Reset trip counter for the distance driven gt Set hours minutes gt Activate deactivate display mode vvv Vv Vv Engine revolutions counter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The red scale of the rev counter 1 Fig 2 on page 8 indicates the range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed The system automatically restricts the engine speed to a steady limit You should
19. 158 Location of the head airbag gas filled head airbag Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 177 In the event of a severe side collision the head airbag system offers additional protection for the head and neck area of passengers The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the car Fig 158 A 180 Safety In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the rele vant side airbag and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the acci dent occurs When deployed the airbag covers the windows of the front and rear doors as well as the door pillar Fig 158 B Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or objects outside of the car is cushioned by the inflated head airbag The reduction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area The head airbag also offers additional protection in the case of an offset impact by covering the front door pillar FJ WARNING General a There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of cloth ing Additionally clothes hangers must
20. Checking proper attachment 162 Removing the tow bar 162 Use and care 163 If your vehicle has already been factory fitted with a towing device or is fitted with a towing device from SKODA Original Accessories then it meets all of the technical requirements and national legal regulations for towing a trailer Your vehicle is fitted with a 13 pin power socket for the electrical connection be tween the vehicle and trailer If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7 pin connec tor you can use a Suitable adapter from SKODA Original Accessories The maximum trailer drawbar load is 80 kg FI WARNING a Check that the tow bar is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting recess before the start of every journey a Do not use the tow bar if it is not correctly inserted and secured in the mounting recess a Do not use the towing device if it is damaged or if there are parts missing a Do not modify or adapt the towing device in any way a Never release the tow bar while the trailer is still coupled CAUTION Take care when handling the tow bar so as to avoid damaging the paintwork on the bumper 160 Driving Description Fig 142 Carrier for the towing device tow bar First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 160 The tow bar can be removed and is kept in the spare wheel compartment or ina compartment for the spare wheel in the boot page 222 Car tool Explanation of graphic
21. Decorative films First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 Wash the films with a mild soap solution and clean warm water Never use harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents as this could damage the films The following instructions must be followed when washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner gt The minimum distance between the nozzle and the vehicle body should be 50 cm gt Keep jet perpendicular to the film surface gt The maximum water temperature is 50 C gt The maximum water pressure is 80 bar CAUTION In the winter months do not use an ice scraper to remove ice and snow from the areas with films Do not use any other objects to remove frozen layers of snow or ice risk of film damage 192 General Maintenance De icing windows and exterior mirrors First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir rors Regularly clean windows from the inside with clean water Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this purpose When drying the windows after washing the vehicle do not use window leathers that have been used to polish the bodywork Residues of preservatives in the window leather can make the window dirty and reduce visibility CAUTION a The ice scraper should not be moved forward and b
22. Fig 195 Rear door Emergency locking aah Coy First read and observe the introductory information given on page 233 An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors which have no locking cylinder it is only visible after opening the door gt Remove the panel A Fig 195 gt Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the di rection of the arrow mirror inverted on the right doors gt Replace the cover After closing the door it cannot be opened from the outside The door is unlocked by pulling on the door opening lever and is then opened from the outside Unlocking the boot lid Fig 196 Emergency unlocking Superb Superb Combi 234 Do it yourself Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 233 Unlocking Superb gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 72 Seat backrests gt Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel as far as the stop Fig 196 A F gt Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow gt Open the boot lid Unlocking Superb Combi gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 72 Seat backrests gt Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening of the trim as far as it goes Fig 196 B gt Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow gt Open the boot lid Selector lever emergency unlocking F
23. Headlight beam adjustment 48 Headlight flasher 50 Instrument lighting 48 Low beam lights 48 Main beam 50 Parking lights 48 54 Rear fog light 52 Switching on and off 48 Tourist lights 51 Travel mode 51 Turn signal 50 Warning lights 13 Loads 245 Lock Car key 30 Individual settings 32 Remote Control 30 Locking KESSY SS l Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside 33 Low beam lights 48 Luggage compartment Emergency unlocking Y 234 Unlocking the bootlid 234 Variable loading floor 88 Luggage net 85 M Main beam 50 Maintenance 143 Decorative films 192 Manual air conditioning Control elements 97 Recirculated air mode 99 Setting 99 Manual gear changing See Gear changing 136 MAXI DOT 26 Main menu 26 Settings 27 MDI Installation in the storage compartment 77 Mirror Additional interior mirror 63 Mirrors External mirrors 64 Interior mirror 63 Vanity 58 Mobile phone 106 109 112 Connecting to the hands free system 109 113 Modes of automatic transmission 137 Modifications 196 Modifications and technical alterations Airbags 198 Service 197 Spoiler 197 Multi function display Functions _ 2 Operation 8 Multifunction display Memory 24 Multimedia 124 AUX IN 125 MDI 125 N
24. for exam ple using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt After unscrewing the towing eye put the cap on and press into place The cap must engage firmly CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting Fig 191 Rear bumper Removing the cap installing the towing eye First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 230 gt Press onto the bottom part of the cap in the rear bumper Fig 191 A and re move it gt Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop Fig 191 B and tighten as much as possible For tightening purposes we recommend for exam ple using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt After unscrewing the towing eye put the cap on and press into place The cap must engage firmly On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device there is no mount for the screw in towing eye behind the cap page 231 Vehicles with a towing device CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting Vehicles with a towing device First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn in
25. hold a finger on the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 31 You can interrupt the opening or closing process for the windows immediately by releasing the key or the the button A and interrupting the locking unlocking Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver s lock is only possible within 45 seconds after locking the vehicle Operational faults First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 The automatic power windows do not work if the vehicle battery was disconnec ted and connected while a window is open The system must be activated Unlocking and opening 43 Activation sequence gt Switch on the ignition gt Pull the top edge of the button and close the window gt Release the button gt Pull the relevant button upwards again for approx 3 seconds and keep it press ed down This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation SS M Convenience operation of sliding tilting roof 45 Electric sliding tilting roof with solar cells 45 The electric sliding tilting roof abbreviated in the following as sliding tilting roof can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor temperature is higher than 20 C The sliding tilting roof can still be operated for approx 10 minutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as the driver or front passenger s door is opened it is no longer pos
26. lel parking spaces The system only operates if the ignition is switched on During the parking procedure the system only takes over the steering move ments the pedals continue to be operated by the driver When the system is activated the warning light Pe lights up Fig 138 on page 152 A The traction control system TCS must always be switched on when parking Basis of the system function gt The measurement and evaluation of the size of parking spaces when driving gt The determination of the correct position of the vehicle for parking gt The calculation of the line on which the vehicle drives backwards into the park ing space or forwards from the parking space gt the automatic turning of the front wheels when parking in or manoeuvring out of the parking space FJ warninec The system does not exempt the driver from his her responsibility for park ing in and manoeuvring out of the parking space a External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on parking in and ma noeuvring out of the parking space Under adverse conditions this may cause objects or people to not be recognised by the system When parking in and manoeuvring out of parking spaces the system auto matically executes quick steering movements While it is doing so do not place your hands between the steering wheel risk of injury a When parking or departing from a parking space on loose or slippery surfa ces grave
27. the disc brake of the wheel being braked The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down Driver Steering Recommendation DSR First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 147 In critical situations the DSR provides the driver with a steering recommendation in order to stabilise the vehicle The DSR is activated for example on the right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 147 The HBA is activated by very quick operation of the brake pedal The HBA increa ses the braking effect and helps to reduce the braking distance In order to ach ieve the shortest possible braking distance the brake pedal must be applied firm ly until the vehicle has come to a standstill The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the HBA The HBA function is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released Hill Hold Control HHC First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 147 When driving on slopes HHC allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal without having to use the handbrake The system holds the brake pressure
28. 107 gt Voice control of the telephone page 120 gt Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 124 All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle s hands free system is established with the help of Bluetooth technology The adapter serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to the vehicle s exter nal aerial i Note The following guidelines must be observed page 106 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 109 To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system the two devices must be paired Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone The following steps must be carried out for the connection gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone gt Switch on the ignition Communication and multimedia 109 gt Select the Phone New user menu in the information display and wait until the hands free system has completed the search gt Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found gt Confirm the PIN gt If the hands free system announces as standard SKODA_BT on the display of the mobile phone enter the PIN within 30 seconds and wait until the connec tion is established gt After terminating the connecti
29. 154 Driver s airbag in the steering wheel front passenger airbag in the ay WARNING dash panel Front airbag and transporting children a Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a prop er restraint system If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 181 Deactivating airbags If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat pay attention to any relevant national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats Fig 155 Safe distance to steering wheel inflated airbags ig WARNING General Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 177 The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel on the passenger side must not have stickers attached be covered or modi fied in any other way These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water No objects such as cup holders mobile phone mounts etc must be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel Fig 154 A be located within their immediate vicinity Never place objects on the surface of t
30. 1592 127 140 141 126 Wheel base 2761 2761 2761 2761 1545 1518 1545 1518 1545 1517 Track gauge front rear 1537 1510 1537 1510 1545 1517 a Applies to vehicles with a rough road package b Applies to vehicles with a sport chassis Applies to vehicles with a 3 6 1 191 kW FSI engine Technical data 247 Vehicle specific information depending on engine type AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 245 The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational and technical data for motor vehicles 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 92 5000 200 1500 4000 4 1390 Performances Superb MG6 Superb Combi MG6 Top speed km h 204 203 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 5 10 6 Permissible trailer load braked kg 14002 1500 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm 730 Max torque Nm at rpm 740 Number of cylinders Displacement cm 112 4300 6200 250 1500 4200 118 4500 62002 250 1500 45002 4 1798 Performances Superb MG6 Superb DSG7 Superb MG6 4x4 Superb Combi Superb Combi Superb Combi MG6 DS
31. 204 Windscreen wiper Replacing the rear window wiper blade 236 Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 236 Windscreen wipers Cleaning the windscreen wiper blades 236 Operating 60 Windscreen washer fluid 204 Windscreen wipers and washers 59 Windshield wiper alternative parking position of the rear wind screen wiper 61 Winter operation 220 Snow chains 220 Winter tyres 220 Winter tyres See Wheels 220 Index 261 SKODA AUTO a s pursues a policy of constant product and model development We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape equipment and engineering may be introduced at any time The information about appearance performances dimensions weight standards and functions of the vehicle is correct at the time of publication Some equipment might only be introduced at a later date or might only be offered in certain markets informa tion is provided by SKODA Partners It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data illustrations and descriptions contained in this Own er s Manual Reprinting reproduction translation or any other use either in whole or in part is not permitted without the written consent of SKODA AUTO a s SKODA AUTO a s expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws Subject to change Issued by KODA AUTO a s KODA AUTO a s 2013 SKODA Service App SKODA Service in your pocket The SKODA Service application is designed
32. 5 C can flow out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the cooling system fresh air mode should be selected The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to pro vide cooling at a high load of the engine CAUTION Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold Ris Note We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a specialist garage once every year Control elements PASSENGER AIR BAG 4 B3T 0588 Fig 109 The air conditioning system Control elements First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 97 Functions of the individual controls Fig 109 A Set the temperature turn to the left to reduce the temperature turn to the right to increase temperature Set the blower stage stage O blower off stage 4 the highest blower stage The air conditioning system 97 Setting the direction of the air outlet page 96 Switch cooling system on off Switching the rear window heater on off page 58 Aux heating on off page 103 Open close the fresh air supply recirculation page 99 8 amp 9 a x x i Note The warning light i
33. 76 Car park ticket holder 73 Cigarette lighter 76 Clothes hook 80 Cup holders 75 Glasses storage box 78 Removable through loading bag 82 Seat backrest with through loading channel 81 Storage compartment for umbrella 80 Storage compartment in rear centre console ____ 81 Storage compartment in the front centre console 74 Storage compartment on the driver s side 74 Storage compartment on the passenger side _ 79 Storage compartments in the doors 74 Storage compartment under the armrest 77 Storage compartment under the passenger seat 79 Storage net in the front centre console _ 78 Storage pockets on the front seats 80 R Radiator fan 203 Radio remote control Auxiliary heating aux heating 105 Raise vehicle 225 Rear fog light 52 Rear interior light 55 Rear mirror 62 Interior mirror 63 Rear seats Seat folded forward Combi 72 Rearview mirror Mirrors 64 Rear window heater 58 Recirculated air mode Manual air conditioning 99 Recirculation Climatronic 102 Recommended gear 22 Refuelling 199 Fuel 199 Remote control Replacing the battery 232 Synchronisation process 233 Remote Control Lock 30 Unlock 30 Remote control key Replacing the battery 232 Removable lamp Combi 57 Removable lights Combi Changing rechargeable light batteries 57 Removable light Combi Remove the lamp 57
34. CD is ejected Ejecting all CDs gt Press and hold the button A Fig 118 for more than 2 seconds All CDs in the CD changer are ejected consecutively 126 Using the system i Note a Always guide the CD into the CD case B Fig 118 with the printed side facing upwards a Never force the CD into the CD case as it is drawn in automatically a After loading a CD into the CD changer wait until the indicator light of the cor responding button D is illuminated Then the CD case B is free to load the next CD a If a position is selected on which a CD is already located this CD is ejected Re move the ejected CD and load the desired CD DVD preinstallation B3T 0521 Fig 119 Seat backrest left front seat right front seat Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 124 Description A Openings for attachment of DVD player holder Audio video input Connection input DVD player Only one DVD pre installation is factory installed in the seat backrest of the front seat The DVD player holder and DVD player can be purchased from KODA original ac cessories For a description of the use refer to the operating instructions for these devices and equipment EJ WARNING a f there are passengers on both of the rear seats the DVD player holder must not be used on its own without the DVD player risk of injury a The inclination of the holder can be adjusted to three preset pos
35. Does not apply to the Superb Combi Fig 106 Attachment points for roof bars First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 93 Installation location of the attachment points for roof bars Fig 106 A Forward attachment point Rear attachment point Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions CAUTION Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the enclosed instructions Roof load First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 93 The maximum permissible roof load including roof rack system of 100 kg and the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower load carrying capacity is used In this case the roof rack system must only be loa ded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions This chapter contains information on the following subjects Air outlets 96 Using the air conditioning system economically 96 Operational problems 97 The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature If the cooling system is switched on the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle The cooling system prevents the windows from misting up during winter months
36. Even in the event of an emergency petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol min 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating 91 RON if petrol with the octane rating 95 RON is not available Even in the event of an emergency petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Unleaded petrol with higher octane number Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the en gine can be used without limitations On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95 91 RON the use of petrol witha higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticeable power in crease or a lower fuel consumption On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min 95 RON the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel consumption Prescribed fuel unleaded fuel 98 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 98 RON Unleaded petrol 95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance 200 General Maintenance In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating91 RON of unleaded fuel with octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not available Even in the event of an emergency petrol of a lower octane number tha
37. For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting gt Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed gt Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head C Fig 148 on page 169 gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 171 In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated page 181 Deactivating airbags Manual front passenger adjustment page 66 Electrical front passenger seat adjustment page 66 Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 168 To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an ac cident the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following gt Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of the head C Fig 148 on page 169 gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 171 gt Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi cle page 184 Transporting children safely Examples of incorrect seated positions First read and observe
38. Handbrake 13 Braking system 14 A Seat belt warning light 14 Generator 14 Open door 14 s 7 Engine oil pressure 14 E Coolant temperature coolant level 15 gt Bonnet 15 lt sTailgate 15 Power steering steering lock KESSY system 16 Engine oil level 16 amp 3Traction Control System TCS 16 amp Electronic Stability Control ESC 17 Antilock brake system ABS 17 O The rear fog light 17 Bulb failure 17 Adaptive headlights 18 Exhaust inspection system 18 ov Glow plug system diesel engine 18 EPC EPC fault light petrol engine 18 Diesel particle filter diesel engine 18 D Fuel reserve 19 Airbag system 19 U Tyre control display SS B amp Windscreen washer fluid level 20 O 3Brake pad thickness 20 Turn signal system _ 20 Z0 Low beam 20 0 Fog lights 20 Cruise control system S20 Selector lever lock starting KESSY system 20 zO Main beam 21 The indicator lights show certain functions faults and may be accompanied by au dible signals F warnine a f illuminated indicator lights and the corresponding descriptions and warn ing notes are not observed this may result in severe injuries or major vehicle damage The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and fire when working in the engine compart ment e g inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids It is essential to ob
39. Modes and selector lever operation si Manual gear changing Tiptronic 138 Starting off and driving 138 Operational faults EJ WARNING Do not depress the accelerator if changing the forward driving mode risk of accident a Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving risk of acci dent a When the vehicle is stationery and the engine is running the vehicle must be held in mode D S or R with the brake pedal Even when the engine is idling the power transmission is never completely interrupted the vehicle creeps LI CAUTION a f the selector lever is moved to mode N while driving the accelerator pedal must be released and you will need to wait until the engine has reached its idling speed before moving the selector lever to a forward driving mode again a At temperatures below 10 C the engine can only be started in the selector lever position P a When stopping on a slope never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal this may lead to gear damage Modes and selector lever operation 10 14 D EA Ml a 5 3 1100km 18 5 km trip 12440 1253 2 Fig 127 Selector lever Instrument cluster display Fig 128 Shiftlock button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 136 When the ignition is switched on the gearbox mode and the currently selected gear are indicated in the instrument cluster display 1 Fig 127 The following
40. Ree Lights and visibility Turning the rotary switch B from position to 3 gradually activates the head light beam adjustment thereby shortening the beam of light Fig 31 The positions of the width of illumination correspond approximately to the fol lowing car load Front seats occupied boot empty 1 All seats occupied boot empty 2 All seats occupied boot loaded 3 Driver seat occupied boot loaded Instrument lighting The instruments are also illuminated when the side light low or high beam light is switched on Turning the rotary switch C when the lights are switched on adjusts the bright ness of the instrument lighting Fig 31 FJ warnine Always adjust the headlight beam to satisfy the following conditions The vehicle does not dazzle other road users especially oncoming vehicles The beam range is sufficient for safe driving Note a We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched on a The Bi Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the ve hicle when the ignition is switched on and when driving Vehicles that are equip ped with Bi Xenon headlights do not have a manual headlight range adjustment control Dayl dri lights DAY LIGHT First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 The daytime running lights function provides the lighting of the front of the vehi cle Deactivating the
41. Seat backrests o gt o 7 Rear seat folded forward Superb Combi 72 Seat heaters B3T 0493 Fig 57 Heating Front seats rear seats AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 69 The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the two outer rear seats can be heated electrically The seat heating can only be switched on when the engine is running Switching on the front seat heater gt Press the area of the controller in the area of the symbol or y Fig 57 A Switch on rear seat heater gt Press the symbol button or ty Fig 57 B By pressing the button once the heating is switched to the highest intensity level 3 which is indicated by all three of the indicator lights in the switch lighting up With repeated pressing of the switch the intensity of the heating is down regula ted up to the switch off The intensity of the heating is indicated by the number of illuminated indicator lights in the switch Seats and useful equipment 69 EJ WARNING If you have a subdued pain and or temperature sensitivity e g through medi cation paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes we recommend not to use the seat heating This can lead to burns on the back the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal If the seat heating is used we recom mend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances so that the body ca
42. Tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure including that of the spare wheel at least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey The tyre pressures for tyres are shown on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 173 The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times Wheels 215 Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Do not reduce the higher pressure of warm tyres With greater additional load adjust the tyre inflation pressure accordingly Driving style Fast cornering sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres Balancing wheels The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced When driving however there are a range of factors that may result in an imbalance This may become apparent by a vibration in the steering Have the wheels rebalanced after replacing the tyres Wheel alignment errors Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear of the tyres Tyre damage Drive over kerbs and other such obstacles slowly and at right angles wherever possible in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage punctures cuts splits and bulges etc on a regular basis Remove foreign bodies e g small stones from the tyre tread immediately Replacing wheels If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres we recommend replac i
43. Unlocking the vehicle with the KESSY system This function enables you to unlock all the doors individual doors both doors on the left or right vehicle side The other doors the fuel filler flap and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened again Automatic locking unlocking All doors are locked from a speed of around 15 km h The button in the handle of the boot lid is deactivated If the ignition key is withdrawn the car is then automatically unlocked again In addition it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by press ing the central locking button The vehicle doors can be unlocked and opened at any time by pulling once on the door opening lever Locking unlocking the vehicle from the inside Fig 16 Central locking button a k B3T 0261 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 29 If the vehicle was not locked from the outside it can also be unlocked and locked with the rocker switch on the door opening lever of the driver or front passenger door Fig 16 even without the ignition switched on Locking gt Press the button Fig 16 The symbol in the button comes on Unlocking gt Press the button Fig 16 The symbol in the button is no longer illuminated The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking button gt It is not possible to open the doors or t
44. Vehicle dimensions 247 Vehicle height 247 Vehicle identification number VIN 245 Vehicle length 247 Vehicle width 247 Visibility 58 Visors see Sun screen 59 see Sun visors W 58 13 Warning lights Warning triangle Washing Automatic car wash system by hand Chrome parts High pressure cleaner Water Driving through water Wax treatment See Taking care of your vehicle Weights Wheel bolts Anti theft wheel bolt Caps Loosening and tightening Wheel rims Wheels Bolts Changing Full trim General information Load index Replacing wheels Service life of wheels Snow chains Spare wheel Speed symbol Storing wheels Tyre pressure Tyre sizes Tyre wear indicator Unidirectional tyres Winter tyres 221 189 189 189 192 190 145 191 245 225 219 224 214 220 222 219 214 216 215 215 220 218 217 215 215 215 215 217 220 Wheels and tyres Hubcaps 219 Wi Fi 116 Information display 117 Network connection 117 Switching off T16 Switching on T16 Window convenience operation 43 Windows De icing 192 See electric power windows 41 Windscreen Heater 58 Windscreen washer fluid Checking 204 Replenishing 204 Warning light 20 Winter 204 Windscreen washers Windscreen washers 60 Windscreen washer system
45. a B3T 0645 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 65 Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head rest is at the same level as the upper part of your head Setting height gt Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as re quired Fig 54 A gt To move the head restraint downwards press and hold the safety but ton Fig 54 B with one hand and press the head restraint downwards with the other hand The front seats and head rests must be adjusted to match the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most ef fective levels of protection to the passengers page 168 Correct seated posi tion Removing installing gt Pull the head restraint up out of the seat backrest as far as the stop for the rear head restraints fold the seat backrest forward gt Press the locking button in direction of the arrow Fig 54 B and pull the head restraint out gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place Removing and installing rear middle head rest Applies to vehicles using the TOP TETHER system gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop gt Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 55 simultaneously press th
46. a Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts a When fitting unidirectional tyres ensure that the direction of rotation is cor rect page 214 Follow up work First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 222 The following steps must also be performed after changing the wheel gt Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special screw page 218 gt Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided gt Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible gt Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible gt Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair options EI warnine a If it is determined that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when changing the wheel the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque a Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked 1 Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti theft wheel bolts page 225 224 Do it yourself Loosening tightening wheel bolts Fig 182 Changing a wheel Loosening the wheel bolts B3T 0593 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 222 Loosening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt up to the stop gt Grasp the end of the wrench
47. access point factory settings Prioritisation Set the connection priority Calls Set the connection priority for calls Data Set the connection priority for data transfer Encryption Set the encryption WPA2 Enable WPA 2 encryption Open No encryption Visibility Set the Wi Fi network visibility Visible Wi Fi network is visible to other devices Invisible Wi Fi network is not visible to other devices Data roaming Set the data roaming No roaming Data roaming is not allowed Allow Data roaming is allowed Always ask Question setting for data roaming Wi Fi channel Select Wi Fi network channels preferably set to channel 11 Channel 1 Channel 11 Display the Wi Fi network channels Reset Reset Wi Fi network factory settings 118 Using the system Communication and multimedia 119 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Dialogue 2 Voice commands GSM II 121 Voice commands GSM III 121 Dialogue BIT 0173 Fig 116 Multifunction steering wheel Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 120 The voice control system hereinafter referred to as the system makes it possible to use voice commands for some functions of the hands free system The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to carry them out is called a dialogue The system gives audible feedback and guides you i
48. and safety warn ings H on page 73 EJ WARNING Use the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not impaired Storage compartment in the front centre console Fig 67 Opening the storage compart ment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 Open close gt Press on the edge of the roof A Fig 67 in the direction of the arrow Closing takes place in the reverse order F warnine The storage compartment must never be used as an ashtray or for the stor age of combustible materials fire hazard and risk of damage to the storage compartment i Note The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which lights up when the parking light is on Fig 68 Front centre console Cup holder A q A g A B3T 0649 Fig 69 Rear armrest Remove cup holder insert cup holder First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder Cup holder at the front On vehicles that are fitted with a cover for cup holders you can cover the cup holder by pulling on the handle A Fig 68 in the direction of the arrow Rear cup holder gt Press on the front end of the armrest in the direction of the arrow Fig 69 A the cup holder comes out gt To slide the cup holder in again press t
49. and safety warn ings H on page 73 Opening gt Pull and open the cover of the armrest using the handle A in the direction of the arrow Fig 73 Closing gt Open the lid to the stop only then can it be folded downwards and against the direction of the arrow Fig 73 This storage compartment is located with the lettering AUX marked AUX IN input and the MDI input Seats and useful equipment 77 i Note The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light which lights up when the parking light is on Storage net in the front centre console Fig 74 Front centre console Storage net First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 FI WARNING Only store soft objects with a total weight of 0 5 kg in the storage net Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION Do not place any sharp objects in the nets risk of net damage 78 Using the system Glasses storage box Fig 75 Opening the glasses storage box T First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 Opening gt Press the button A Fig 75 The box folds in the direction of the arrow Closing gt Swivel the lid on the glasses storage box against the direction of the ar row Fig Z5until it is heard to lock EI WARNING The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the spectacles and otherwise m
50. and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction of the arrow Fig 182 Tightening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt up to the stop gt Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt against the direction of the ar row Fig 182 until it is tight E WARNING Undo the wheel bolts only a little about one turn provided that the vehicle has not yet been jacked up Otherwise the wheel could come off and fall down risk of injury T Note If it proves difficult to undo the bolts carefully apply pressure to the end of the wrench with your foodt Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so and make sure you keep your footing Raising the vehicle Fig 183 Jacking points for positioning lifting jack B3T 0669 Fig 184 Attach lifting jack First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 222 Position the car jack below the jacking point that is closest to the faulty wheel Fig 183 The jacking point is located directly below the engraving in the lower sill gt Insert the crank into the mount on the car jack page 222 gt Position the lifting jack below the jacking point with the crank and move it up until its claw is positioned below the vertical web of the lower sill gt Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the web Fig 184 B gt Support the base plate of the jack with its entire surface resting on level ground and ensure that the lever i
51. are driving Range The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display It indicates the dis tance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the level of fuel in the tank and the same style of driving The display is shown in steps of 10 km After lighting up of the indicator light i the display is shown in steps of 5 km The fuel consumption over the last 50 km is used to calculate the range The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner If the memory is set to zero after disconnecting the battery the fuel consump tion of 10 Itr 100 km is calculated for the range afterwards the value is adapted accordingly to the style of driving Distance travelled The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the dis play page 24 Memory If you want to measure the distance travelled from a particular moment in time on at this moment reset the memory by setting the button to zero page 24 Memory The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1999 km or 9 999 km on vehicles with an information display The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded Average speed The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in km hour page 24 Memory To determine the average speed over a certain pe riod of time set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement page 24 Memory After erasing the memory no value appears in the display u
52. bag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body chest stomach and pelvis is reduced on the side facing the door Airbagsystem 179 E WARNING E WARNING Observe the following instructions for the correct seated position a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never a Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of cloth airbag You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident This ap ing plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable a Ensure that there are no excessive forces such as violent knocks kicks etc child safety seat page 185 Child safety and side airbag impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged There must not be any further persons animals as well as objects posi The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case tioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag No ac a Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger cessories such as cup holders should be attached to the doors seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by SKODA In view of the a If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling they may be fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat use of non ap exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident
53. be used for dividing the boot or for securing the objects which are being transported Telescopic pole Insert the holders for the telescopic pole into the left and right openings of the carrier rails Press the top part of the holder in the direction of the arrow 1 101 and simultaneously push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place Tensioning strap Insert the tensioning strap holders into the opening on the left or right carrier rail Press the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 and simultaneously push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 4 Seats and useful equipment 91 gt Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place gt Place the object that is to be secured behind the tensioning strap gt Press the button 5 on the top side of the holder and tighten the strap F WARNING The objects in the boot must be firmly secured with the fixing set so that they cannot move freely and uncontrollably and to prevent damage to objects or injuries to occupants i Note Do not use the fixing set to secure objects that might damage the fixing set The tensioning strap can also be fully reeled up by pressing the button 5 Fig 101 Movable lashing eyes Fig 102 Moveable lashing eyes all B3T 0600 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 89 There are four moveable lash
54. ciations Starting off and Driving 145 Headlights Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 145 The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically It illuminates the side of the road on which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the road than in your home country the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle oncoming drivers In order to avoid this the headlights must be adjusted at a specialist ga rage Headlights with Xenon lights can be adjusted in the menu of the information dis play page 51 Note You can find out more information on adjusting the headlights at a specialist ga rage 146 Driving CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Electronic Stability Control ESC 147 Antilock Braking System ABS 148 Traction Control System ASR 148 Electronic Differential Lock EDL 148 Driver Steering Recommendation DSR 148 Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA 149 Hill Hold Control HHC 149 FJ warninec A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to shut down The brake assist systems would then fail to function risk of accident a Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions The increased safety provided by the brake assist systems must not tempt you to take safety
55. close the lid manually during the electrical closing process Dam age can occur to the system of the electric boot lid a f the lid is closed manually it must be ensured that when moving the lid into the lock pressure is applied to the centre edge of the lid above the SKODA logo CAUTION Before opening or closing the lid check if there are any objects in the opening or closing range which could obstruct the movement e g a load on the roof rack Fig 25 Lid operation operating areas or on the trailer etc risk of causing damage to the lid Ensure that there is at least 10 cm of clearance above the opened lid e g dis First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn tance from the garage ceiling Otherwise it may happen that the clearance ings El on page 38 above the opened lid is no longer sufficient after relieving the vehicle of a load e g after unloading risk of causing damage to the lid Control elements a In certain circumstances if the lid is loaded e g by a thick layer of snow the opening process of the lid can be interrupted Remove the load on the lid to re enable the electrical operation a f the lid closes automatically e g under load of snow you will hear an inter mittent beep The lid can be operated with the following control elements gt With the symbol button lt on the remote control key press for about 1s gt With the handle A on the outer part of the lid
56. driving for 10 minutes page 228 Emergency equipment and self help 227 EI WARNING a The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is being inflated there is a risk of injury Do not place the hot tyre inflation hose or hot air compressor on flammable materials there is a risk of fire a If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2 0 bar this means the damage sus tained was too serious The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre Do not drive the vehicle Seek help from a specialist garage l CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest there is a risk of overheating Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switch ing it on again Check after 10 minutes driving First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 226 Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes If the tyre pressure is 1 3 bar or less gt Do not drive the vehicle You cannot properly seal with tyre with the break down kit gt Seek help from a specialist garage If the tyre pressure is 1 3 bar or more gt Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value see inside of fuel filler Cap gt Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum speed of 80 km h 228 Do it yourself CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Jump starting usi
57. entered manually 2 Some mobile phones have a menu in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth connec tion is completed by inputting a code If the authorisation input is required it must always be per formed when re establishing the Bluetooth connection 110 Using the system Disconnecting the connection gt By withdrawing the ignition key gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt By disconnecting the user in the Bluetooth User menu item in the information display Solving connection problems If the hands free system reports No paired phone found check the operating Status of the mobile phone gt Is the mobile phone switched on gt Is the PIN code entered gt Is Bluetooth active gt Is the visibility of the mobile phone active gt Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands free system Note a If a Suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone only use your mobile phone in the adapter inserted in the telephone mount so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum a Placing the mobile phone in the adapter inserted in the telephone mount en sures optimum sending and receiving power Inserting the mobile phone and adapter Fig 114 Universal telephone preinstalla tion AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 109 Only one telephone mount is factory fitted An adapter for the mobile phone can be pu
58. fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat Children must be fastened page 184 Transporting children safely with a Suitable restraint system BE WARNING Continued The front seats and head restraints must be adjusted to match the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat except objects de signed for this purpose e g child seats risk of accident FI warninc As the driver observe the following instructions a Only adjust the driver s seat when the vehicle is stationary risk of accident a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and a dis tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard Ensure that there are no objects in the driver s footwell as these may get caught in the pedal apparatus when driving or braking page 136 You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate FJ warnine As the front passenger observe the following instructions Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to proper ly protect you hazard Always keep your feet in
59. floor Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened when installing the variable loading floor If this is not the case there is a risk of injury for the occupants B3T 0598 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 88 gt Lift up the part with the mounting and secure it by sliding it into the grooves CL Introduction marked with the arrows Fig 95 a A This chapter contains information on the following subjects i Partial extension of variable load floor 90 Removing variable load floor Dividing the boot 90 Removing and refitting the variable loading floor 91 Fixing set 91 Movable lashing eyes 92 The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg fig Note Fig 96 Boot Remove variable loading floor remove carrier rails The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects for example the fastening elements removed foldable boot cover etc B3T 0659 Seats and useful equipment 89 Partial extension of variable load floor Fig 97 Boot partially pulling out the variable loading floor First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 89 The variable loading floor can be partially pulled out over the rear bumper gt Grasp the rear of the variab
60. following message appears in the information display Check coolant Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine check the level of the coolant page 208 and refill the coolant if necessary page 208 If the coolant is within the specified range the increased temperature may be caused by an operating problem at the radiator fan Check the fuse for the radia tor fan replace if necessary page 239 Fuses in the engine compartment Do not continue driving if the warning light does not go off even if the coolant level is correct and the fuse for the fan is in working order Seek help from a specialist garage EJ warnine a f you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle If the engine is hot the cooling system is pressurized risk of scalding It is therefore best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap a Do not touch the radiator fan The radiator fan may switch itself on auto matically even if the ignition is off gt Bonnet First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light comes on if the bonnet is unlocked EJ warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the eng
61. for smartphones operating on iOS and Andriod systems and its purpose is to help SKODA AUTO customers in any difficult situation they may encounter on their travels My dealer choose your nearest or preferred Service Centre Assistance contact the Assistance Service or your favourite dealer My car complete Owner s Manual and summary list of all control lamps for quick review SKODA Manual App Know your vehicle The SKODA Manual application aims on users of tablet PCs who are interested in SKODA vehicles or already own one The application contains full featured digital version of the Owner s Manual for all current SKODA models Navigation through the list of content gt Classical reading page by page gt Full text search throughout the whole manual gt Bookmarks for fast access to favourite chapters Available to download from AppStore for iOS and Google Play for Android Minimisation of fuel consumption and CO emissions Recyclability Start stop system All models currently in production homologised Recovery in conformity with the requirements for recyclability Indication of recommended gear EU Directive 2005 64 EC Use of recyclable environmentally friendly materials Weight reduction Use of recycled materials with the parameters of the Optimisation of high strength panels reduction ra materia preterren of thickness in panels and other materials Labelling of materials for the purpose of
62. for the rear and front window heating Climatronic manual air conditioning Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 58 Explanation of graphic G Switching the rear window heater on off Switching the windscreen heater on off When the heater is switched on a lamp lights up inside the button The front and rear window heater only operates when the engine is running The windscreen and rear window heater automatically switches off after approxi mately 10 minutes 58 Using the system SA For the sake of the environment The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de iced or free from mist The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel econ omy page 143 Saving electrical energy i Note a If the on board voltage drops the windscreen and rear window heater switches off automatically to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine con trol page 213 Automatic load deactivation a If the light is flashing inside the button the heater is off due to low battery Sun visors B3T 0619 Fig 43 Sun visor double sun visor Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 58 The sun visor for the driver or front passenger can be pulled out of the fixture and swivelled towards the door in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 43 The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers Push the cover in the
63. function daylight driving lights gt Pull the turn signal and main beam lever to the steering wheel and push down wards Fig 32 on page 50 gt At the same time switch on the ignition and hold the lever down in this position for at least 3 seconds Activating the function daylight driving lights gt Pull the turn signal and main beam lever to the steering wheel and push up wards Fig 32 on page 50 gt At the same time switch on the ignition and hold the lever down in this position for at least 3 seconds The daylight driving lights can also be activated or deactivated via the information display in the menu item Dayl dri light page 27 The daytime running lights are switched on automatically if the following condi tions are met v The ignition is switched on JV The light switch is in the position O or AUTO Fig 31 on page 48 Note When the daytime running light is switched on the side lights neither at the front or rear and the number plate lights are not lit Lights and visibility 49 Turn signal and main beam HOSSZ Operating lever Turn signal and main beam operation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 The parking light page 54 and headlight flasher are also operated with the op erating lever The following functions can be operated with the operating lever Fig 32 A Right turn signal on Left turn signal on High beam on sp
64. heater Power to the internal fuse carrier Fuse assignment in the engine compartment version B Power supply for terminal 15 ignition on a In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine the electrical components of this terminal are automatically switched off No Power consumer Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG Measuring circuit Valves for ABS KRW N 240 Do it yourself CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Headlights SSS 2A Replacing bulb for low beam 242 Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 242 Replacing bulb for low beam _ S gt 24 Replacing the bulb for the fog light 243 Replacing the bulb for the licence plate light 243 Rear light Superb Combi 2G Replacing bulbs in rear light Superb Combi 244 Some manual skills are required to change a bulb For this reason we recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help in the event of any uncertainties gt Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb gt Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs The designa tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb gt A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot F WARNING a Always read and observ
65. heating you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected by you leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in an open position It is recommended to put the air flow in the position 2 or 3 Switching on off PASSENGER AIR BAG B3T 0631 Fig 111 Button for switching on off the system directly on the operating part of the air conditioning Climatronic First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 103 The auxiliary heating aux heating can be switched on off as follows Manually switching on using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning Clima tronic The warning light in the button lights up Fig 111 ON by using the radio remote control page 105 104 Using the system Manually switching off using the button on the operating part of the manual air conditioning Clima tronic The warning light in the button goes out Fig 111 OFF by using the radio remote control page 105 After switching off the auxiliary heating the coolant pump runs for a short period Automatic switching on off The following menu items can be selected from the Aux heating menu item in the information display page 26 depending on the vehicle equipment Day of the wk Set the current day of the week Running time Set the required running time in 5 minute increments The run ning time can be 10 to 60 minutes Mode Set the de
66. in the net Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION Do not place any sharp objects in the nets risk of net damage Boot cover Pig SE Removing installing the luggage compartment cover B3T 0319 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 Removing gt Hook the support straps 1 Fig 89 onto the tailgate gt Place the cover in the horizontal position gt Pull the cover out of the holders 2 horizontally towards the rear The removed boot cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest Install gt Push the boot cover into the brackets 2 Fig 89 gt Hook the support straps 1 onto the tailgate EI warnine No objects should be placed on the boot cover the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something 86 Using the system CAUTION Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not dam aged as a result of objects placed in this area If the retaining strips 1 are attached to the tailgate the boot cover will raise when you open the tailgate Roll up boot cover Superb Combi Fig 90 Roll up boot cover Pull out and roll up remove First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 Pulling out gt Pull the foldable boot cover as far as the stop into the secured position 2 Fig 90
67. in the vicinity of the knee airbag Fig 156 If it is not possible to meet this requirement due to your body size visit a specialist garage a The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column not have stickers attached be covered or modified in any other way This part should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water No objects must be attached to the cover of the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects bunch of keys etc to the igni tion key These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and can cause injuries Fig 157 Location of the side airbag in the driver s seat gas filled side air bags Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 177 In the event of severe side collisions the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body chest stomach and pelvis of passengers in the ve hicle The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front seats Fig 157 A The rear side airbags are located between the entrance area and the seat back rest When the side airbags Fig 157 B are deployed the head airbag and belt ten sioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated air
68. indicates that the temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox is too high The following message appears in the information display Gearbox overheated Stop Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and wait until the light lt goes out risk of gearbox damage You can continue your journey as soon as the symbol disap pears Problem with the engine oil pressure If the Asymbol is shown in the information display you must have your vehicle checked immediately by a specialist garage The information about the maximum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol EI warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 i Note a If warning messages are shown in the information display these messages must be confirmed with the button B Fig 12 on page 26 on the windscreen wiper lever or with the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel to call up the main menu a As long as the operational faults are not rectified the symbols are always indi cated again After they are displayed for the first time the symbols continue to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects
69. information and safety warn ings H on page 184 Classification of child seats according to the ECE R 44 standard Group Weight of the child Approximate age 0 up to 10 kg up to 13 kg up to 9 months up to 18 months up to 4 years up to 7 years over 7 years 9 18 kg 15 25 kg 22 36 kg Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 184 Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard Rear seat middle Front passenger Rear seats seat outside 186 Safety Front passenger Rear seats seat outside Rear seat middle U Universal child seat category a child seat designed to be attached to the seat using the seat belt CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Anchor eyelets for the ISOFIX system 187 Use of child seats with the ISOFIX system 187 Anchor eyelets forthe TOP TETHER system 188 Anchor eyelets for the ISOFIX system Fig 162 Rear seat ISOFIX Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 186 There are two locking eyes between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing the ISOFIX system child seat in place Use of child seats wi
70. instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is too low page 16 Engine oil level Check the oil level using the dipstick as soon as possible Add oil accordingly CAUTION The oil level must not exceed the range A Fig 168 there is a risk of damaging the exhaust system Replenishing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 204 gt Check the oil level page 206 gt Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening Fig 166 on page 203 gt Replenish the oil in portions of 0 5 litres in accordance with the correct specifi cations page 205 gt Check the oil level page 206 gt Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully Changing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 204 The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or according to the service interval indicator page 11 Service Interval Display CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Capacity 207 Checking the coolant level 208 Replenishing 208 The coolant consists of water with coolant additive This mixture guarantees anti freeze protection protects the cooling heater system against corrosion and pre vents lime formation Vehicles exported to countries with a mild climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offer
71. is only displayed at speeds up to around 50 km h When the speed exceeds 50 km h reactivate the system using the Pe button Speed too high Please take over steering The parking procedure was ended because the speed was exceeded Park with a max speed of 7 km h O Driver steering intervention Please take over steering The parking procedure is terminated due to a driver steering intervention Park Assist finished ASR deactivated The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the TCS system is deactiva ted Activate the TCS 154 Driving ASR deactivated Please take over steering The parking procedure was ended because TCS was deactivated during the park ing procedure O Trailer Park Assist finished The parking procedure cannot be carried out because a trailer is hitched Time limit exceeded Please take over steering The parking procedure was ended because the time limit of 6 minutes was passed Park Assist currently not available The system cannot be activated because a fault exists on the vehicle Seek help from a specialist garage O Park Assist finished System currently not available The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle Seek help from a specialist garage Park Assist faulty Workshop The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists in the system Seek help from a specialist garage Park Assist finished Please take over steering
72. items of clothing such as zip fasteners rivets sharp edged belts jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface Such damage cannot be subsequently recognised as a justified complaint a The use of a mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface of the steering wheel a Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular basis and each time after cleaning The cream nourishes the leather allows it to breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture It also creates surface protection a Some clothing materials e g dark denim do not have sufficient colour fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers even when used correctly This applies particularly to light coloured seat covers This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover but rather to poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles Note When using the vehicle minor visible changes may occur to the leather parts of the covers e g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress applied to the covers Artificial leather fabric and Alcantara First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 194 Artificial leather Clean artificial leather with a damp cloth If this method does not completely clean the artificial leather use a mild soap sol ution or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose Fabric C
73. juntil you hear it click ti Note The side compartment where the battery is located is labelled in the Superb Com bi vehicles with the symbol 88 Using the system Non closable side pocket Superb Combi Fig 94 Removing non lockable side compartment B3T 0658 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 Increasing the size of the boot gt Remove the cover of the stowage compartment in the direction of the ar row Fig 94 CAUTION When handling the side compartment ensure that the cover and the cover mountings are not damaged CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Dividing the boot 89 Removing variable load floor 89 The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg afl Note First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 88 The room under the variable loading floor can be used to stow objects gt Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes A Fig 96 to the left by around 90 Dividing the boot gt Fold up and remove the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow gt Unlock the carrier rails B by turning the arbour mounted fixing eyes C to the right by approx 90 Fig 95 Dividing the boot with variable HA WARNING loading
74. mode is active at speeds of 15 50 km h Motorway mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can respond in time to an obstruction or other hazard in time The mode is activated gradually from a speed of 90 km h It is most effective at speeds above 120 km h Rain mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted so that the driver can reduce the glare from oncoming vehicles in rain The mode is active at speeds of 15 70 km h and if the windscreen wipers contin uously operate for a period of time longer than 2 minutes The mode is deactiva ted when the windscreen wipers are switched off for longer than 8 minutes Dynamic cornering lights The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted to the steering angle so that the road in the curve is illuminated This function is active at speeds greater than 10 km h and in all AFS modes Tourist light travel mode This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system driving on the left right without dazzling the oncoming vehicles When this mode is active the above mentioned modes and the side swivel of the headlights is deactivated This mode can be activated deactivated via the information display in the menu item Travel Mode page 27 EJ warninc If the AFS system is defective the headlights are automatically lowered to the emergency position which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic This
75. net partition by the tab A Fig 103 in the direction of the fasteners C gt Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts C and push forwards gt In the same way insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle Folding gt First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other side and remove it from the mounts C Fig 103 gt Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged i Note If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment the roll up luggage compart ment cover can be removed page 86 Using the net partition behind the front seats Fig 104 Net partition behind the front seats in the pulled out state B3T 0331 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 92 Pulling out gt Fold the rear seats forward page 72 gt Pull the net partition by the tab A Fig 104 gt First of all insert the cross rod into the mount C on one side and push it for ward gt In the same way insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle Folding gt First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other side and remove it from the mounts C Fig 104 gt Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged gt Fold t
76. not be used to hang up items of cloth ing a The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head air bags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deployed When the deployed head airbag is inflated parts of the accessories fitted could be thrown into the interior of the car and injure the occupants page 196 a The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de ployment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed a There must no other persons e g children or animals between the passen ger and the deployment area of the head airbag In addition none of the occu pants should lean their head out of the window when driving or extend their arms and hands out of the window EJ warninec The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front doors For this reason no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or door panels e g installation of additional loudspeakers Resulting damage can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system Any work on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage The following instructions must be observed a Never drive with inner door panels removed a Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and th
77. note that transporting heavy objects alters the handling properties of the vehicle due to the displacement of the centre of gravity risk of acci dent The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly a f the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with un suitable or damaged lashing straps injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents To prevent items of luggage from moving around always use suitable lashing straps which must be firmly attached to the lash ing eyes The transported items must be stowed in such a way that no objects are able to slip forward on sudden driving or braking manoeuvres risk of injury a When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en larged by folding the rear seats forward ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats page 169 a f the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied ensure maxi mum safety e g by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision Do not drive with the luggage compartment lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poi soning Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle risk of accident Do not transport people in the boot CAUTION Make sure that transported objects wit
78. of one of the arrows 2 Fig 59 Front armrest Fig 60 Adjusting armrest AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 69 The armrest is adjustable for height and length Setting height gt First of all fold the cover downwards and then lift it in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 60 to one of the 4 fixed positions Move gt Move the cover into the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 60 The armrest includes a storage compartment underneath page 77 i Note Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the hand brake Rear armrest Fig 61 Fold the armrest forwards gt B3T 0643 AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 69 Folding forward gt Fold down the armrest in the direction of the arrow Fig 61 A cup holder may be located in the armrest page 75 Seats and useful equipment 71 Seat backrests Fig 62 Seat backrest locking unlocking AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 69 The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backrests forward The seat backrests can be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided rear seats Folding forward Before folding the seat backrests forwards adapt the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests gt Push the lever
79. on the operation of the lid does not function using the remote control key 40 Using the system Operating the lid with the button C does not work if the vehicle was locked from the outside Operating the lid with the symbol button lt gt on the remote control key and the button C does not work when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle Acoustic signals First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 38 The acoustic signals serve as a safety function and provide information about the success of a performed action Opening with the button lt on the remote control key or with the button C Fig 25 on page 39 Interrupted tone Automatic closing of the lid page 39 M in section In troduction Force limiter 1 continuous tone 3 rising tones Confirmation of the storage of the lid position 3 identical tones fault Adjusting deleting the top lid position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 38 Adjusting gt Stop the lid in the desired position electrically or manually gt Press and hold the button B Fig 24 on page 39 for longer than 3 seconds Storing the new position is confirmed with an audible signal Delete gt Carefully lift up the lid manually to the maximum opening position gt Press and hold the button B Fig 24 on page 39 for longer than 3 seconds An audible signal
80. on the ignition and press the lever into position 4 Fig 46 on page 60 The windscreen wiper arms move into the home position Replacing the rear window wiper blade Fig 200 Rear window wiper blade First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 236 Removing the wiper blade gt Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen gt Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism 1 Fig 200 gt Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 Attaching the wiper blade gt Push the windscreen wiper blade until the stop and it locks in place gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Fuses in the dash panel 238 Fuses in the engine compartment 239 Fuse assignment in the engine compartment 239 Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses Replacing fuses gt Switch off the ignition and the appropriate consumer before changing a fuse gt Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operating page 238 Fuses in the dash panel or page 239 Fuse assignment in the engine compart ment gt Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the cover of the fuse box in the dash panel place it on the relevant fuse and pull it out gt A blown fuses is recognisable by t
81. one of the higher levels after approx 10 seconds The operation of the factory fitted radio or navigation system is described in separate operating instructions to be found in the on board literature Settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 26 You can change certain settings by means of the information display The current setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top be low the line You can select the following menu options Language You can set the language for the warning and information texts here Automatic blind Combi This is where the automatic roll up function of the boot roll cover can be deacti vated activated when opening the boot lid MFD displays Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here Comfort The following functions can be activated deactivated or adjusted here Activate deactivate the function for automatically clos ing the window and the tilt slide sunroof in a locked ve hicle when it starts raining If the function is set and it Rain cosina is not raining the windows including the panoramic tilt slide sunroof will close automatically after approx 12 hours ATA confirm Activate deactivate the audible signalling the activation of the anti theft alarm system Activate deactivate the central locking and automatic Central locking locking function also applies to th
82. opening 45 Operation Fig 29 Control dial for the sliding tilting roof B3T 0578 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 45 Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 29 When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the wind noise is reduced Open partially gt Turn the switch to a position in area D Open fully gt Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position spring tensioned po sition Tilting roof gt Turn the switch to position A gt Press the switch in the region E towards the roof Closing gt Turn the switch to position A gt Press the switch on the recess E down and pull forwards Force limiter The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter The sliding tilting roof stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because there is something in the way e g ice The sliding tilting roof can be fully closed without a force limiter by pressing the switch on the recess E down and then pushing it forward until the sliding tilting roof is fully closed E 46 Using the system EI WARNING When closing the sliding tilting roof proceed with caution to avoid causing crushing injuries risk of injury CAUTION During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding tilting roof before opening it to preve
83. other multimedia units page 124 gt Internet connection page 116 gt Display of SMS messages page 115 All communication between a telephone and the hands free system of your vehi cle can only be established with the help of the following profiles of Bluetooth technology rSAP Remote SIM access profile After connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP profile the telephone deregisters from the GSM network and communication with the network is only enabled by the hands free system via the vehicle s external aerial In the telephone only the interface for Bluetooth remains active In this case you can only use the mobile phone to disconnect from the hands free system de activate the Bluetooth connection or dial the emergency number 112 only valid in Some countries HFP Hands Free Profile After connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the HFP profile the telephone continues to use its GMS module and the internal antenna to com municate with the GSM network Note The following guidelines must be observed page 106 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Connecting the phone to the hands free system AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 112 To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system it is necessary to inter connect the telephone and hands free system Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instruct
84. pedal until driving is resumed The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a Short time such as at a cross roads Parking gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Press and hold the lock button Fig 128 on page 137 gt Move the selector lever into the position P and then release the locking button Launch control The Launch control function allows the vehicle to reach maximum acceleration when starting off in mode S or Tiptronic gt Activate the ASR page 147 Brake assist systems gt Deactivate START STOP page 158 gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot gt Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot gt Release the brake pedal The vehicle starts off with maximum acceleration Reactivate the ASR and START STOP as soon as the desired speed is reached Kickdown The kickdown function allows you to achieve the maximum acceleration of your vehicle while driving When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed the kickdown function is activated in any forward driving mode The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed and engine speed and the vehicle accelerates The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range 10 This function is only valid for some engines
85. pointer moves into the mid range of the scale At very high ambient temperatures or heavy en gine loads the pointer may move even further to the right High temperature range If the pointer reaches the red area of the scale the coolant temperature is too high Further information page 15 CAUTION Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet im pair the cooling efficiency of the coolant Instruments and Indicator Lights 9 10 22 Fig 4 1 Display types Travel time 30 min 18 5 km o o i p 12440 1253 2 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The instrument cluster can have one of the following types of display Fig 4 A Segment display B Information display CAUTION Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display e g when cleaning to prevent any possible damage On vehicles with the KESSY system switch off the ignition and open the driver s door Fuel gauge Fig 5 Fuel gauge 10 Using the system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The fuel gauge Fig 5 only operates if the ignition is switched on The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres The indicator light in the instru ment cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve mark ing page 19 CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is compl
86. read and observe the introductory information given on page 221 The fire extinguisher is attached with straps in a holder under the driver seat Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguish er Emergency equipment and self help 221 The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person once a year The national legal requirements must be observed EI WARNING The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants E Note The fire extinguisher must comply with national legal requirements Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher Proper functioning of the fire extinguisher is not assured once it has passed its expiry date a The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only Car tool Fig 181 Vehicle tool kit Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 221 The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the storage space for the spare wheel There is also space here for the removable ball rod for the trailer towing device The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel 222 Do it yourself The components of the vehicle tool kit if included in the vehicle Fig 181 Screwdriver Key for removing and installing the
87. result the braking effect of the engine will be used reducing the load on the brakes Any additional braking should be completed in termittently not continuously Wear and tear The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driving style The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted Under these severe conditions the thickness of the brake pads must also be checked by a specialist garage between service intervals Wet roads or road salt The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Faults in the brake surface If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further the brake system may be faulty Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriate ly as you will not know the exact extent of the damage Low brake fluid level An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the br
88. revs beyond the permissible maximum rpm thereby causing engine damage a Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is stationary or when driving in in dividual gears SA For the sake of the environment Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds Shifting up sooner helps save fuel reduces engine noise and protects the environment E Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 140 New tyres must firstly be run in as they do not offer optimal grip at first There fore drive especially carefully for the first 500 km or so mi Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 140 New brake pads do not initially provide optimal braking performance They first need to be run in Therefore drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or so This chapter contains information on the following subjects Looking ahead 141 Economical gear changing gt M Avoiding full throttle 142 142 gt Reducing idling Avoiding short distances 142 Checking tyre inflation pressure gt gt gt R Avoiding unnecessary ballast 143 Regular maintenance 143 Saving electrical energy SB Environmental compatibility 143 The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the ve hicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works SKODA places a partic ular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the en
89. rolled up After fixing the net parti tion in place it is not longer possible to unroll the net partition E WARNING a After placing skis into the through loading bag you must secure the bag with the securing strap B Fig 83 The strap A must hold the skis tight a Make sure that the strap A holds the skis in front of the binding also refer to imprint on the removable through loading bag a The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 24 kg i Note a The through loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis a Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and the sticks with the tips facing to the rear into the removable through loading bag a f there are several pairs of skis in the removable through loading bag ensure that the bindings are positioned at the same height a The removable through loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when moist CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Class N1 vehicles 84 Fasteners 84 Fixing nets 84 Folding hook 85 Floor covering 85 Luggage net 85 Boot cover BG Roll up boot cover Superb Combi 86 Automatic Retractable cargo cover Superb Combi 87 Side compartments in the boot BB Side compartments in the boot with battery 88 Non closable side pocket Superb Combi 88 Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling char acteristics
90. safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents a Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp edged fittings a The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat Further information page 185 Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat l CAUTION When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward adjust the head re straints so that they are as high as possible i Note We recommend that you use child seats from KODA Original Accessories These child seats were developed and also tested for use in SKODA vehicles They meet the ECE R 44 standard Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Never use a backwards facing child restraint system on a seat that is protected by an active airbag installed in front of it This could cause the child severe injury or even death Fig 160 Sticker on the B column on the front passenger side B3T 0672 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 184 For safety reasons we recommend that you install child seats on the rear seats whenever possible The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the front passenger Seat gt The front passenger airb
91. send time Callback Dial the phone number of the sender of the text message Copy Copy the received text message to the SIM card Delete Delete the message Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item User Overview of the stored telephones Connect Connection with the telephone Disconnect Disconnection of telephone Rename Rename the telephone Delete Delete the telephone a New user Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range Visibility Switches on the visibility of the hands free system for other devices Media player Media player Active device Connected device Paired devices List of paired devices Connect Connection with the device Rename Rename the device Delete Delete the device Authorisation Authorise the device Search Search for available media players Visibility Switch on the visibility of the hands free system for media players in the vicinity Modem Overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to the internet Active device Connected device Paired devices List of paired devices Phone name Option to change the name of the hands free system default SKODA_BT 1 Only applies when connecting the telephone to the hands free system via the rSAP profile WLAN Wi Fi menu item page 117 Operating a Wi Fi network in the information dis play Settings The following menu it
92. serve safety notes page 201 Engine compartment Handbrake First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light comes on if the handbrake is applied An audible warning is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6 km h The following message appears in the information display Release parking brake Instruments and Indicator Lights 13 Braking system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light illuminates if the brake fluid level is too low or there is a fault in the ABS The following message appears in the information display Brake fluid Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the brake flu id page 209 ff E WARNING a If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 a The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level page 201 Engine compartment a f the warning light is displayed simultaneously with warning light page 17 Antilock brake system ABS do not continue your jour ney Seek help from a specialist garage a A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehicl
93. shift into the next higher gear before the red scale of the revolution counter is reached or select mode D on the automatic gearbox Follow the recommended gear to prevent engine speeds that are too high or too low page 22 SA For the sake of the environment Correct shifting up has the following advantages a t helps to reduce fuel consumption a t reduces the operating noise m t protects the environment a t benefits the durability and reliability of the engine Speedometer First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 Warning against excessive speeds An audible warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km h The audible warning signal is switched off when the vehicle speed falls below 120 km h 1 This function is only valid for some countries Coolant temperature display Fig 3 Coolant temperature gauge ly my we 90 E w r 130 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The coolant temperate display Fig 3 only operates when the ignition is switch ed on Cold range If the pointer is still in the left area of the scale it means that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature Avoid high speeds full throttle and high engine loads This prevents possible damage to the engine The operating range The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the
94. side gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 2 Fig 159 OFF gt Close the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Check that warning light OFF 3 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF in the text lights up after the ignition is switched on Switching on gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 1 Fig 159 ON gt Close the storage box on the front passenger s side gt Check that warning light OFF 3 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up after the ignition is switched on EJ warnine The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag a If the warning light OFF is flashing the front passenger airbag will not be de ployed in an accident Have the airbag system checked by a specialist garage immediately Airbag system 183 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 185 Child safety and side airbag 185 Classification of child seats 186 Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt 186 Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat In contrast to adults the muscles and bone structure of child
95. sounds and the height which was originally set is deleted from the memory while the basic position of the top lid position is again set The top lid position is adjusted for example in the following situations gt When the space for opening the lid is limited e g garage height gt For a more convenient operation such as by a person s height The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically is always lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is opened manually The lid always opens to the height which was last stored Malfunctions First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 38 If the battery is disconnected and reconnected while the lid is open it is necessa ry to activate the system of the electric boot lid Activation means closing the lid by hand Thus the end position of the lid is stored under fully closed in secured lock Examples of operational malfunctions Description of the malfunc tion The lid cannot be lifted out of the lock Possible solutions Emergency unlocking of the lid page 234 Remove any obstacle e g snow open the lid The lid does not react toan again page 39 opening signal Press the handle A and pull the lid upwards The lid remains in the top po bas Manual closing of the lid sition CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Openi
96. temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating EJ WARNING a Never use the safety eyelet for towing a Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic sit uation Improper or incorrectly connected electric cables can energise the trailer and cause functional faults to the vehicle s entire electrical system as well as acci dents and severe injuries a Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist garages a Never directly connect the trailer s electrical system with the electrical con nections for the tail lights or other current sources Note a After coupling the trailer and connecting the power socket check that the rear lights on the trailer are working correctly a f there is an error in the trailer lighting check the fuses in the fuse box in the dash panel page 238 a Contact between the breakaway cable and the safety eyelet can result in me chanical wear on the surface protection of the eyelet Such wear does not impair the functioning of the safety eyelet and does not constitute a fault It is excluded from the warranty coverage a f you tow a trailer frequently you should also have your vehicle inspected be tween service intervals a The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be applied when coupling and un coupling the trailer Trailer stabilisation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 163 The trailer
97. the message Steering lock defective appears then the electric steering lock is bro ken Park the car do not continue the journey After switching off the igni tion it is then no longer possible to lock the steering to activate the electrical components e g radio navigation system to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine Seek help from a specialist garage FE WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Note If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnected the yellow indica tor light comes on after switching on the ignition The indicator light must go out after driving a short distance Visit a specialist garage if the yellow warning light stays on after having started the engine again and driving a short dis tance 16 Using the system Engine oil level First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light lights up oil quantity too low The following message appears in the information display Check oil level Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 206 The indicator light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds If no engine oil has been replenished the indicator light will come on again after driv
98. the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi gation system menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen navigation system 2 This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system 112 Using the system Media player Playback via Bluetooth Active device Connected device Paired devices List of paired devices Search Device search Phone name Option to change the name of the phone default SKODA_BT Settings The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item Telephone book Phonebook Update Update the phone book List Arrange the entries in the phone book Surname Arrange according to surname First name Arrange according to first name Ring tone Ring tone setting Back Return to the telephone s basic menu CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Connecting the phone to the hands free system 113 Operate the telephone via the information display 114 Internet connection via Bluetooth CT The following functions are included in the universal telephone preinstallation GSM III gt Phone Phonebook page 109 gt Convenience operation via the multifunction steering wheel page 107 gt Operation of the telephone via the information display page 114 gt Voice control of the telephone page 120 gt Music playback from the telephone or
99. the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 168 Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if seat belts are fastened correctly Passive Safety 169 Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers especially children Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving The following list contains instructions which if not observed may cause serious injuries or death This list is not complete however we would like you to familiar ise yourself with this subject Observe the following instructions while driving gt Do not stand up gt Do not stand on the seats gt Do not kneel on the seats gt Do not tilt the seat backrest too far back gt Do not lean against the dash panel gt Do not lie on the rear seats gt Do not sit only on the front part of the seat gt Do not sit facing to the side gt Do not lean out of the window gt Do not put your feet out of the window gt Do not put your feet on the dash panel gt Do not put your feet on the seat cushion gt Do not allow anybody to travel in the footwell gt Do not drive without fastening your seat belt gt Do not delay in the luggage compartment 170 Safety CQ Introduction Fig 149 Driver wear
100. the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 62 Manual dimming interior mirror gt Adjust the lever at the lower edge of the mirror towards the windscreen the mirror dims A Fig 47 gt Adjust the lever at the lower edge of the mirror away from the windscreen home position B Automatic dimming mirror gt Press the button D the warning light C lights up the mirror is activa ted Fig 48 To deactivate press the button D again the warning light C goes out If automatic dimming is activated the mirror dims automatically depending on the light striking the mirror from the rear When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged the mir ror always moves back into the basic position not dimmed Do not attach external navigation devices on to the windscreen or in the vicinity of the automatic dimming interior mirror page 62 H in section Introduction Additional interior mirror Fig 49 Additional interior mirror First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 62 The additional interior mirror allows the driver a wider field of view of the rear seats Adjusting the angle gt Take hold of both the upper and lower edge of the mirror such that you are not touching the surface of the mirror gt Adjust the mirror in direction of arrow to the desired position F warnine Concentrate at all times fully on your drivi
101. the radio remote control Delayed locking can be deactivated by a specialist garage at any time Ria Note More detailed information about this is available from a SKODA Partner CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operating description _ 8D Acoustic signals 40 Adjusting deleting the top lid position 40 Malfunctions 4 Force limiter The electric boot lid is fitted with a force limiter If the lid hits an obstacle when closing it stops and an audible signal sounds If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the boot lid the whole vehicle may jerk and as a result the movement of the lid can be in terrupted Manual operation Manually opening and closing the lid is only possible in exceptional cases and must be completed slowly and without sudden movements as close to the centre of the lid as possible Operating description Handling the sides of the lid can damage the electric lid FJ warnine a Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid Other wise the boot lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving even it was locked risk of accident a Never drive with the boot lid open or ajar as otherwise exhaust gases may A zs get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning CAUTION The movement of the lid can be stopped by applying an abrupt and quick force against the lid a Do not try to
102. the stop gt Fit the connector gt Replace the fog lamp by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 2 Fig 208 B and tighten gt Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in The protective grille must engage firmly Fig 210 Remove the number plate light replace the bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 241 Change gt Open the boot lid gt Insert a slotted screwdriver at the location indicated by the arrow Fig 210 A press it in lightly and unlatch the springs gt Remove the lamp gt Pull the faulty bulb out of the holder in the direction of the arrow Fig 210 B gt Insert a new bulb into the holder gt Replace the lamp and lightly press it until the spring latches Fuses and light bulbs 243 Rear light Superb Combi Fig 212 Seal expand lighting connector First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 241 Removing gt Open the boot lid gt Insert the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 222 Car tool into the hole at the position indicated by the arrow Fig 211 A gt Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 211 A gt Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the lamp Fig 211 B gt Grasp the rear light and carefully remove away from the direction of travel gt Remove the rubber seal i
103. the tyre especially at higher speeds This can result in tread separation and a tyre blowout The following instructions for the use of tyres must be observed For the first 500 km new tyres do not yet provide optimum grip and appro priate care should therefore be taken when driving risk of accident Only use radial tyres of the same type size rolling circumference and tread pattern on all four wheels a For reasons of driving safety do not replace tyres individually Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity for the tyres fitted there is a risk of an accident Never exceed the maximum permissible speed for the tyres fitted there is a risk of an accident 214 General Maintenance EJ WARNING Observe the following information regarding the wheel bolts a The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily Never apply grease or oil a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm a f the wheel bolts are tightened to an insufficient tightening torque the rims may come loose when the car is moving risk of accident A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim a f the wheel bolts are handled incorrectly the wheel may come loose when the car is moving risk of accident EJ warninec Observe the following information regarding the spare wh
104. the vehicle has a factory fitted towing device or a towing device from SKODA original accessories and it is driven with a trailer a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 The CORNER function lights the front fog lamp on each side of the vehicle to illu minate the area around the vehicle when turning parking etc The CORNER function is switched on automatically if the following conditions are COMING HOME LEAVING HOME hereafter referred to only as function makes it met possible to automatically switch on the lights for a short time after leaving the vehicle or when approaching the vehicle in poor visibility gt v The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply to the PP J P y right or left Z The vehicle is stopped or moves at a speed of no more than 40 km h v The engine is running 1 If both switch on conditions are conflicting for example if the front wheels are turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on the turn signal light has the higher priority 52 Using the system The function is switched on automatically if the following conditions are met JZ The light switch is in position AUTO Fig 33 on page 50 v The visibility in the vehicle environment is reduced v The ignition is switched off The functions and settings of
105. the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported e g by train or ship or The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the driver door using the key towed within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle CAUTION i Note The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in terior monitor To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor the glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehicle a The anti theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked even if the safe securing system is deactivated The interior monitor is however not activa ted E Button for interior monitor and If the car is unlocked with the key in the driver door insert the key into the igni tion and switch the ignition to deactivate the alarm system E towing protection This chapter contains information on the following subjects TwinDoor open close small lid 37 TwinDoor open close large lid 37 Superb Combi 38 Automatic locking 38 gt 36 Using the system EJ WARNING a Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid Other wise the boot lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving even it was locked risk of accident a Never drive with the boot lid open or ajar as otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning Do not press on the rear window when closing the luggage compart
106. tilting roof 1 Applies to emergency operation of the Superb sliding tilting roof 2 Applies to emergency operation of the Superb Combi sliding tilting roof gt Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then pushing the entire part upwards Have the fault on the sliding tilting roof rectified as soon as possible by a special ist garage hig Note a It is necessary after each emergency operation to move the sliding tilting roof into the basic position This is why the rotary switch must be set to the switch position A Fig 28 on page 44 and pressed forward for about 10 seconds a After each emergency operation it is necessary to activate the roof page 235 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 235 The panoramic sliding tilting roof referred to form now on as just the sliding til ing roof and the sun screen must be activated after disconnecting and recon necting the battery To activate the sliding tilting roof press the notch on the control dial downwards and forwards for approx 10 seconds To activate the sun screen press and hold the switch G Fig 30 on page 46 for approx 10 seconds If the sliding tilting roof or sun screen is not fully closed or pushed shut when dis connecting and reconnecting the battery they must first be closed or pushed shut page 46 Opening closing the sun screen page 46 Operation Only
107. using the remote control key The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by signal inter ference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same fre quency range e g mobile phone TV transmitter i Note For vehicles with anti theft alarm the acoustic signals can also be activated deac tivated by locking unlocking page 27 Unlocking locking KESSY B3T 0586 Fig 15 KESSY Name of the zones sensors in the handle of the front door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 29 The KESSY system Keyless Entry Start Exit System enables unlocking and lock ing of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key The key must be located at a maximum distance of about 1 5 m from the unlocking or locking area Fig 15 Unlocking gt Grab the door handle of the front door or cover the sensor 2 Fig 15 with the whole palm of your hand Locking gt Touch the sensor 1 Fig 15 with your fingers On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox the selector lever must be moved into the position P before unlocking Unlocking the boot lid gt Press the handle of the boot lid page 36 Switching off the safelock system gt Use your fingers to touch the sensor 1 twice within 2 seconds Unlocking or locking areas A Front door left Front door right Luggage compartment lid Unlocking and opening 31 If you cove
108. via the rSAP profile page 113 gt Select the Wi Fi menu item in the Mobile phone menu The display shows the message Switch on Wi Fi gt Select the Yes menu item If no access point is assigned automatically then this must be entered manually as per the instructions from the mobile network operator e g Internet If the Wi Fi network is switched on the display will show the following message for example WLAN SK_WLAN 1234 switched on The display then shows a password for the Wi Fi network connection The pass word can subsequently be found in the Mobile phone Wi Fi Password Show menu If no data connection via Wi Fi is available the display will show the message Da ta connection not available This can be caused by a weak GSM signal for exam ple Try to establish the connection again at a location with stronger signal recep tion Switching off gt Select the Wi Fi Off menu item in the Mobile phone menu The display shows the message Switch off Wi Fi gt Select the OK menu item The display shows the message Wi Fi switch off Connecting an external device to the Wi Fi network AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 116 Connecting using the Wi Fi network search gt Switch on the Wi Fi network page 116 Switching Wi Fi network on off gt On the device to be connected search for available Wi Fi networks Wi Fi see operating instructions for the device
109. wheel on a level surface as far as possible The following steps must be carried out before actually changing the wheel gt Let all of the occupants get out While changing a tyre the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier gt Switch off the engine gt Move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the auto matic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt If a trailer is connected uncouple it gt Remove the vehicle tool kit page 222 and the spare wheel page 218 from the boot Changing a wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 222 gt Remove the full wheel trim page 219 or caps page 219 gt First of all slacken the anti theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts page 224 gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the ground page 225 gt Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface cloth paper etc gt Remove the wheel gt Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts gt Lower the vehicle gt Alternately tighten wheel bolts opposite diagonally with the wheel wrench Tighten the anti theft wheel bolt last page 224 gt Replace the wheel trim or the caps Emergency equipment and self help 223 EI warnine a All bolts must be clean and must turn easily
110. 0620 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 58 Pulling out gt Pull out the sun screen with the handle A Fig 45 and hang it in the bracket on the top edge of the door Folding gt Remove the sun screen from the handle A Fig 45 and hold it in such a way that it can roll up slowly without being damaged CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Windscreen wipers and washers 60 Alternative parking position of the rear windscreen wiper Superb Combi 61 Headlight cleaning system 61 The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switched on and the bonnet is closed If the intermittent wipe is switched on the intervals are also controlled depend ing on speed When automatic wiping in rain is active the wiper intervals are regulated based on the intensity of the rain Lights and visibility 59 The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on when reverse gear is selected Top up with windscreen wiper fluid page 204 FI warnine Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving page 236 Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures without heating the windscreen beforehand Otherwise the window cleaner could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front a Automatic wiping in rain only operates a
111. 3 Diagnostic socket light switch rain sensor clock 14 Central locking system and bonnet lid 15 Central control unit interior lights 16 The air conditioning system 17 Not assigned 18 Phone 19 Instrument cluster wind shield wiper lever and turn signal lever the relay coil for heating wind shield 20 KESSY 21 KESSY ELV 22 Air blower for Climatronic 23 Front power window central locking of the front doors 24 Selector lever lock AG 25 Rear window heater relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation 26 Power socket in the boot 27 Fuel pump relay control unit for fuel pump injection valves 28 Electric boot lid 29 AG Haldex 30 Climate controlled front seats 31 DVD pre installation 32 Front power window central locking system of the rear doors 33 Electric sliding tilting roof 34 Alarm spare horn 35 front and rear lighter 36 Headlight cleaning system 37 Heated front seats 38 Heated rear seats 39 Rear window wiper Power consumer Fan air conditioning system relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation Not assigned Light switch Control unit for trailer detection Control unit for trailer detection Control unit for trailer detection Switch for seat heating Telephone preinstallation Preparation for the aftermarket radio Only for START STOP Central control unit DC DC converter the en gine control unit Fuses in the engine compartment Fig 202 Cover f
112. A Fig 62 and fold the seat backrest completely forwards Folding backward gt If you removed the head restraint you need to reinsert it with the backrest til ted slightly forwards page 67 gt Hold the rear outer seat belt C Fig 62 against the side trim panel gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing knob A clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest M gt Make sure that the red pin B is hidden 1 Ifthe front seats are too far back we recommend removing the rear head restraints before the seat backrests are folded forward to achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled 72 Using the system EI WARNING a The seat belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after fold ing back the seat backrests they must be ready to use a The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on sud den braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged Only then can the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function CAUTION Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backrests Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the folded back seat backrests Rear seat fo
113. All items of luggage and other loads gt Roof load including roof rack system gt Equipment not included in the operating weight gt Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer max 80 kg Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and EU guidelines The measurement of the intra urban cycle begins with a cold start of the engine Afterwards standard urban driving is simulated In the extra urban driving cycle the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in all gears corresponding to daily routine driving conditions The driving speed varies between 0 and 120 km h The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of about 37 for the intra urban cycle and 63 for the extra urban cycle E WARNING Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights risk of accident and damage Note a f required you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist ga rage a Depending on the range of equipment style of driving traffic situation weather influences and vehicle condition consumption values may deviate from the indi cated values 246 Technical data Dimensions Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 245 Vehicle dimensions mm 4833 4833 4833 1817 1817 1817 Width including exterior mirror 2009 2009 2009 2009 Height 1462 1482 1447 gt 1464 1449 1511 1529 1497 gt 1511 1496 gt Clearance 139 1599 124 1419 140 125 141
114. Fig 24 gt With the button B on the inner part of the lid Fig 24 gt With the button C in the centre console Fig 25 fi Note Operating areas i The system distinguishes 3 operating areas where the function of the individual Switch off the engine in the event of a malfunction and seek assistance from a operating elements changes Fig 25 The end positions of the lid fully closed in specialist garage the secured lock and fully opened differ as well Unlocking and opening 39 The range of the area 3 changes proportionally depending on the setting of the top position of the lid page 40 If the lid is set in the uppermost position in the area 2 the area 3 is not active The range of the area 2 changes proportionally depending on the setting of the top position of the lid Symbol explanation in the operating description A Feasible action O Non feasible action Movement in the opposite direction to the previous movement Lid operation with the handle A The operation of the lid using the handle A is only possible when the vehicle is unlocked Lid operation with the button Operating the lid with the button B is only possible when the lid is open Lid operation with the symbol button lt on the remote control key and the button Area Action Closed lid A B Opening M v Stop O v Closing O O When the ignition is switched
115. G7 MG6 4x4 Top speed km h 219 222 218 215 217 216 213 Acceleration 0 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg 8 8 8 47 8 7 8 8 1500 1700 1600 1800 8 9 8 8 8 9 1500 17009 1600 1800 9 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Applies to India b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 248 Technical data 750 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 118 4500 6200 250 1500 4500 4 1798 Performances Superb MG6 Superb DSG7 Superb MG6 4x4 Superb Combi Superb Combi Superb Combi MG6 DSG7 MG6 4x4 Top speed km h 222 222 219 221 221 218 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 8 2 8 4 8 4 8 3 8 5 8 5 Permissible trailer load braked kg 15002 1700 16002 1800 1500 1700 16002 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 147 5100 6000 280 1700 5000 4 1984 Performances Top speed km h Acceleration 0 100 km h s Permissible trailer load braked kg Superb DSG6 Superb Combi DSG6 240 238 7 7 7 8 1600 1800 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Technical data 249 3 6 Itr 191 kW FSI engine Output kW per
116. Nameplate 245 Net partition 92 Behind the front seats 93 Behind the rear seats 92 Removing and refitting the housing 93 Nets 84 Non closable side pocket Superb Combi 88 O Oil see Engine oil 206 Onboard computer see Multi function display Y 2 Open close tailgate Superb Combi 38 Operation in winter De icing windows 192 Diesel fuel 200 Operation in Winter Vehicle battery Y 2n Outside temperature 23 Overview Engine compartment 203 Index 257 p Paintwork See Paintwork care 191 Paintwork care 191 Panoramic sunroof Combi Closing 45 Opening 45 Sunblind 45 Tilting 45 Park assist 151 Finding a parking space 152 Information messages 154 Parking 152 Parking Automatic brake assist 153 Departing from a parallel parking space 153 Park assist 151 Parking aid 149 Parking aid 149 Operation 150 Visual parking system 150 Parking lights 48 Parking vehicle 35 Part replacement 196 Passive safety before setting off 167 Driving safety 168 Safety equipment 167 Passive Safety 167 Pedals 136 Petrol refer to Fuel 200 Polishing the paintwork See Taking care of your vehicle 191 Power steering 129 Power windows Button in the front passenger door 42 Operational faults 43 258 Index Practical features 73 12 volt power outlet 77 Ashtray
117. Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could destroy the fabric The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liq uids e g acids 196 General Maintenance I WARNING Continued a Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the belt webbing seat belt connections inertia reel or lock is detected the seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage a The seat belts must be fully dried before being rolled up CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects SKODA Service Partners 197 Spoiler 197 Airbags 198 The instructions and guidelines from SKODA AUTO a s must be observed when carrying out any modifications repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition After carrying out modifications repairs or technical alterations the vehicle will comply with German road trans port regulations StVZO Always consult a SKODA Partner page 197 before buying accessories or parts or before carrying out any modifications repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle FI WARNING a f work on your vehicle is not carried out properly this can lead to operation al faults risk of accident and serious injuries We recommend only having these modifications and te
118. ON During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism Convenience operation of sliding tilting roof First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 44 The sliding tilting roof can be operated by locking unlocking using the key or us ing the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 31 gt Press and hold the symbol button amp on the key gt In the KESSY system hold a finger on the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 31 By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor 1 when using the KESSY system the closing process is immediately interrupted EJ warnine Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not work when convenience closing is in operation i Note In case of failure of the sliding tilting roof contact a specialist garage Electric sliding tilting roof with solar cells First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 44 If there is sufficient bright sunlight the solar cells on the sliding tilting roof deliv er power for the fresh air blower Further information page 100 Climatronic automatic air conditioning system The operation of the sliding tilting roof with solar cells is the same as of a normal sliding tilting roof CQO Introduct
119. Removable through loading bag 82 Repairs and technical alterations 196 Replace fuses 237 replacing Vehicle battery 212 Replacing Bulb for low beam 242 Bulb for main beam and daytime running lights 242 Bulb for the fog light 243 Bulb for the licence plate light 243 Bulb in rear light Superb Combi 244 Fuses in the dash panel 238 Fuses in the engine compartment 239 Windscreen wiper blade 236 Replenishing Coolant 208 Engine oil 206 Windscreen washer fluid 204 Roof luggage rack Attachment points 94 Roof rack system 93 Roof load 94 Running in The first 1500 km 140 Running in Brake pads 140 Engine 140 Tyres 140 S Safe securing system 32 Safety 167 Child safety 184 Child safety seats 184 Correct seated position 168 Headrests 67 ISOFIX 187 TOP TETHER 188 Saving electrical energy 140 Screens see Sun screen in the rear doors 59 Seals Taking care of your vehicle 191 Seat Convenience features of passenger seat 71 Seat belt warning light 14 Seat belt height adjuster 174 Seat belts 171 Belt tensioners 174 Cleaning 196 fastening and unfastening 173 Height adjustment 174 Inertia reels 174 The physical principle of a frontal collision 172 Seat features 69 Seats Electric adjustment 66 Front armrest 71 Headrests 67 Heating 69 Manually adjusting 66 Memory 68 Rear armrest 71 Seat backrests 72
120. SIMPLY CLEVER SKODA Superb Owner s Manual This Owner s Manual has been systematically designed to make it easy for you to search for and obtain the information you require Chapters table of contents and subject index The text of the Owner s manual is divided into relatively short sections which are combined into easy to read chapters The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is always specified on the bottom right of the page The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Sub ject index at the end of the Owner s Manual helps you to rapidly find the informa tion you are looking for Direction indications All direction indications such as left right front rear relate to the direction of travel of the vehicle Units of measurement All values are expressed in metric units Explanation of symbols a Denotes a reference to a section with important information and safety advice in a chapter Denotes the end of a section Denotes the continuation of a section on the next page Indicates situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possi ble Denotes a registered trademark Denotes the display in the information display Denotes the display in the segment display Ov E Notes E warnine The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING These WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury
121. The central locking system allows you to lock and unlock all doors the fuel filler flap and tailgate at the same time based on the current setting The safe securing system page 32 is integrated in the central locking system Once the car is locked from the outside the door locks are automatically blocked by the safe securing system H The following takes place after unlocking gt The doors the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are unlocked gt The interior light which is switched by the door contact comes on gt The safe securing system is switched off gt The indicator light in the driver door stops flashing gt The anti theft alarm system is deactivated The following takes place after locking gt The doors the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked gt The interior lights switched by the door contact come on gt The safe securing system is switched on gt The indicator light in the driver door begins flashing gt The anti theft alarm system is activated 0 Depending on the individual setting page 32 Displaying an error If the indicator light in the driver s door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec onds and then lights up for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing again slowly you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage EJ WARNING a f the car is locked and the safe securing system is activated there must not be any person in the car as it i
122. The coolant level must lie between the A and B markings when the engine is cold Coolant level within range under Coolant must be added Top up the coolant level to between the A and B markings when the engine is cold If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low this is indicated by the indicator light lighting up in the instrument cluster page 15 Coolant temperature coolant level We still recommend inspecting the coolant level di rectly at the reservoir from time to time 208 General Maintenance Loss of coolant A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system Do not merely top up the coolant Have the cooling system checked by a specialist garage Replenishing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 207 Only top up with new coolant gt Switch off the engine gt Allow the engine to cool gt Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and unscrew the cap carefully gt Replenish the coolant gt Turn the cap until it clicks into place Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available in an emergency In this case use just water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and coolant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Checking the level 209 Changin
123. The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision gt Front side airbag on the side of the accident gt Rear side airbag on the side of the accident gt Head airbags on the side of the accident In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed gt the interior lighting comes on if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position gt the hazard warning light is switched on gt all the doors are unlocked gt the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front airbags CB Driver s knee airbag 179 Side airbags 179 Head airbags _ 8 Airbag system 177 Front airbags o WARNING Correct seated position a For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or dashboard A Fig 155 Not maintain ing this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered which can lead to in juries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct There must not by any further persons animals or objects positioned be tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag Fig
124. The system provides assistance to the driver with automatic brake assist The au tomatic brake assist does not exempt the driver from his her responsibility for the accelerator brake and clutch Assist systems 153 Automatic braking for preventing cancellations caused by excessive speeds Automatic brake support can be used in order to stop the speed from exceeding 7 km h thereby preventing the subsequent cancellation of the parking procedure The parking procedure can be resumed after automatic braking Automatic braking takes place only once per parking procedure Automatic braking for damage limitation The system detects an imminent collision based on the driving speed and the dis tance from the obstacle automatic brake support is initiated The system function is ended after this automatic brake assist for damage limita tion EI WARNING Automatic brake assist only works as an element of the assist function The driver must always be ready to brake the vehicle him herself a Automatic brake assist is ended after around 1 5 seconds Depress the brak ing pedal so that the vehicle does not start moving by itself Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 151 The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display O Park Assist Speed too high Reduce speed to under 40 km h parallel parking or under 20 km h bay parking This message
125. The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been un locked If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safelock system or anti theft alarm system will be switched on This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally The seat and mirror are adjusted after the vehicle is unlocked page 68 Locking The turn signal lights flash once as confirmation that the vehicle has been locked If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed The current position of the seat and mirror after the vehicle is locked page 68 Checking the battery condition The battery is empty if the red warning icon B Fig 14 does not flash when you press a button on the remote control key Replace the battery page 232 FJ warnine If the car is locked from the outside and the safelock system is switched on there must not be any person in the car as it is then not possible to open ei ther a door or a window from the inside The locked doors make it more diffi cult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk to life CAUTION a Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and the vehicle is in your line of sight a f the driver door is open the vehicle cannot be locked
126. This can re proved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective sult in serious injuries page 184 Child seat function of the side airbag a Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module i9 must be repaired immediately by a specialist garage WARNING a The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage cracks The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front or deep scratches It is not permissible to use force in order to open the mod doors For this reason no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or door ules panels e g installation of additional loudspeakers Resulting damage can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system Any work on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage The Head airbags following instructions must be observed a Never drive with inner door panels removed a Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the re sulting openings have not been properly sealed a Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed unless the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional loud speakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner door pan els a Always have work carried out by a KODA service partner or a professional specialist garage Fig
127. WARNING The through loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are placed in a properly secured removable through loading bag page 82 Removable through loading bag Fig 83 Securing the through loading bag B3T 0676 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 The removable through loading bag is solely used for transporting skis Loading gt Open the boot lid gt Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards page 81 Rear seat backrest with through loading channel gt Place the empty removable through loading bag in such a way that the end of the bag with the zip is in the boot gt Push the skis into the removable through loading bag from the boot H gt Close the through loading bag Securing gt Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bind ings Fig 83 82 Using the system gt Fold the seat backrest a little forward gt Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around the upper part of the seat backrest gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlocking button clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest gt Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it clicks into place On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition guide the securing strap around the housing when the net partition is
128. _ ST Recirculation 102 Controlling blower 102 Defrosting windscreen __ gt The Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best possible setting of the tem perature of the outflowing air the blower stage and air distribution The system also takes sunlight into account which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met JV A C Fig 110 on page 100 switched on v The engine is running JZ The outside temperature is above approx 2 C The cooling system is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to pro vide cooling at a high load of the engine Aeration of the vehicle when ignition is switched off On models fitted with power sliding tilting roof with sollar cells the fresh air blower is automatically switched over to solar mode if the sun ray s are suffi cient after switching off the ignition The solar cells on the sliding tilting roof de liver power for the fresh air blower This supplies the interior of the car with fresh air For an optimum ventilation the air outlet vents 2 and 3 must be opened Fig 107 on page 96 The ventilation functions only when the sliding tilting roof is fully closed 100 Using the system i Note a We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage once every year a On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted radio or radio navigation system the Climatronic infor
129. a Regularly check the ground under the vehicle Have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the ground Note We recommend that your vehicle be serviced on a regular basis by a SKODA serv ice partner Saving electrical energy First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 When the engine is running the alternator generates and supplies electrical pow er If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on more fuel is needed to operate the alternator We therefore recommend switching off electrical components if these are no longer required Environmental compatibility First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 Environmental protection has played a major role in the design material selection and production of your new SKODA Particular emphasis has been placed on the following points Design measures gt Joints designed to be easily detached gt Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system gt Improved purity of different classes of materials gt Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260 gt Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO9 Starting off and Driving 143 gt Minimum fuel leakage during accidents gt Reduced noise Choice of materials gt Extensive use of recyclable mater
130. ackward but in one direction to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass a Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel sand or salt must not be removed from the windows and mirrors there is a risk of dam age to the surface of the windows and mirrors a Do not remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water risk of cracks forming in the glass a When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage a Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp edged objects or corrosive and acidic cleaning agents there is a risk of damaging the heating elements or window aerial Headlight lenses First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 Clean plastic front headlight lenses using clean warm water and soap CAUTION a Never wipe headlights with a dry cloth a Do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses as this may damage the protective paintwork and consequently cause cracks to form on the headlight lenses Do not use any harsh cleaning products or chemical solvents to clean the head lights as this could damage the headlight lenses Door lock cylinders First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 Specific products must be used for de icing door lock cylinders CAUTION When washing your vehicle ensure as little wat
131. ag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat H gt If possible adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the back of the child seat gt If possible move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it gt With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3 make sure that the loop around fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the same height as the loop around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side gt Set the height adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible gt Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible gt Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac cording to the specifications in the manufacturer s user manual of the child seat FJ wAaRNING a The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 181 Deactivating airbags a Never use a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passen ger airbag is activated This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag The airbag may cause the child severe or even fatal injuries in the event of it being deployed a This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on th
132. ake system The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically page 14 Braking system Brake booster The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Handbrake Fig 125 Centre console Handbrake B3T 0611 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 134 Apply gt Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards Release gt Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking button Fig 125 gt Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button The handbrake indicator light lights up when the handbrake is applied provi ded the ignition is on A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the hand brake applied The following message is shown in the information cluster display Release parking brake The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more than around 5 km h for more than 3 seconds EJ WARNING Please note that the handbrake must be fully released A handbrake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating This can have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system risk of accident Starting off and Driving 135 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manual gear changing SSS Pedals Fig 126 Gearshi
133. an result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 Fig 107 on page 96 in the opened position Recirculated air mode First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 97 Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing ina traffic jam Switching on off gt Press the symbol button lt The indicator light in the button lights up gt Press the symbol button lt again The indicator light in the button goes out Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control Fig 109 on page 97 is turned to position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing the symbol button F WARNING Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up The air conditioning system 99 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control elements __ 000 automatic mode 101 Switching the cooling system on off 101 Setting the temperature
134. ange Bulbs fuses Changing Brake fluid Engine oil Wheels Changing a wheel Follow up work Preliminary work Remove and attaching a wheel Charging a vehicle battery Checking Battery electrolyte level Brake fluid Coolant Engine oil Oil level Properly attaching the tow bar Windscreen washer fluid Children and safety Child safety Side airbag Child safety lock Child seat Classification ISOFIX on the front passenger seat TOP TETHER Use of child seats Use of ISOFIX child seats Chrome parts refer to Taking care of your vehicle Cigarette lighter Clean Alcantara Artificial leather Fabric Cleaning Covers of electrically heated seats Headlight lenses 241 237 209 206 222 224 223 223 212 211 209 208 206 162 204 184 185 186 187 188 186 187 192 76 195 195 195 189 195 192 Natural leather 194 Plastic parts 191 Wheels 193 Climatronic 100 automatic mode 101 Control elements 100 Controlling blower 102 Cooling system 101 Defrosting windscreen 103 Recirculation 102 Setting the temperature 101 Clock 12 Clothes hook 80 Cockpit 12 volt power outlet 77 Ashtray 76 Cigarette lighter 76 General view 7 Lights 54 Practical features 73 Storage compartments 73 COMING HOME 52 Compartments 73 Computer see Multi function display Y 2 Convenience operat
135. atches a Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides a If possible do not apply any paint care products to parts of the bodywork that come into contact with door seals or window guides Plastic parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth If this method does not completely clean the plastic parts use cleaning products specially designed for this purpose CAUTION Do not use paint care products on plastic parts Rubber seals First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 All door seals and window guides are factory treated with a colourless matt var nish layer to prevent the freezing of painted body parts and to protect against driving noise Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products whatsoever CAUTION Applying additional treatments to the seals can corrode the protective coating and driving noise may occur Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 191 Chrome parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a soft dry cloth If this method does not completely clean chrome parts use a specific chrome care product CAUTION Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment risk of surface scratches
136. attery is sufficient v The fuel supply is adequate the warning icon Dis not lit in the display of the instrument cluster Auxiliary ventilation The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by switching off the engine whereby the interior temperature is effectively de creased e g with the vehicle parked in the sun Auxiliary heating aux heating The auxiliary heating aux heating can be used when stationary when the en gine is switched off to preheat the vehicle and while driving e g during the heat ing phase of the engine The auxiliary heating auxiliary heating functions in connection with the air con ditioning system or Climatronic The auxiliary heating aux heating also warms up the engine This is not valid for vehicles with the 3 6 1 191 kW FSI engine The auxiliary heating parking heating warms up the coolant by combusting fuel from the vehicle tank The coolant heats air flowing into the passenger compart ment as long as the blower fan speed is not set to zero F warnine a The auxiliary heating aux heating must never be operated in closed rooms e g garages risk of poisoning a The auxiliary heating aux heating must not be allowed to run during refu elling risk of fire The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating aux heating is located on the un derside of the vehicle Therefore if you wish to operate the auxiliary heating aux heating do not
137. been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to al low the heated air to escape When driving the cooling system should not be on if the windows are open SA For the sake of the environment Pollutant emissions are also lower when fuel is being saved page 140 Econom ical driving and environmental sustainability Operational problems First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 95 If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than 5 C there is a problem in the system The reasons for this may be gt One of the fuses has blown Check the fuse and replace if necessa ry page 237 gt The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot page 9 If you are not able to resolve the operational problem yourself or if the cooler output has reduced switch off the cooling system and seek assistance froma specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control elements 97 Setting OSS Recirculated air mode 99 The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met v A C Fig 109 on page 97 switched on v The engine is running Z The outside temperature is above approx 2 C Y_ The blower switch is switched on positions 1 4 Under certain circumstances air at a temperature of about
138. bility of the hands free system for other devices in the Mobile phone Bluetooth Visibility menu gt Use the device that is to be connected to search for available Bluetooth devi ces 1 The name of the access point is defined by the mobile operator 116 Using the system gt Select the hands free system as standard SKODA_BT from the list of found devices gt Enter the password on the device being connected and follow any instructions given on this device or in the information display gt Enter the desired Internet address in the Internet browser The operating sys tem requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access de pending on the operator usually 99 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Switching Wi Fi network on off T16 Connecting an external device to the Wi Fi network Y m Operating a Wi Fi network in the information display 117 Wi Fi is a wireless network for connecting to the Internet Using a mobile phone connected with the universal telephone preparation GSM III via the rSAP profile it is possible to establish a Wi Fi network in the vehicle and to enable passengers with compatible devices to connect to this network Switching Wi Fi network on off AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 116 Switching on gt Connect the mobile phone with the universal telephone preparation GSM III
139. ble I If the lever 1 does not turn automatically or if the release pin 2 does not pop out remove the tow bar from the mounting recess by turning the lever down wards as far as it can go Clean the tapered surfaces on the tow bar and the mounting recess gt Lock the lock on the operating lever by turning the key 3 by 180 to the right see green marking 3 is visible and remove the key in the direction of the arrow gt Insert the cap 4 onto the lock in the direction of the arrow M gt Check that the tow bar is securely attached page 162 F WARNING Keep your hands outside the lever s range of motion when attaching the tow bar risk of finger injuries a Never attempt to pull the operating lever upwards forcibly to turn the key Doing so would mean the ball head is not attached correctly Towing a trailer 161 CAUTION a After removing the key always replace the cap on the lock of the operating lev er risk of dirt getting into the lock a Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely a After removing the ball head always place the cap on the mounting recess Checking proper attachment Fig 145 Check that the tow bar is attach ed properly First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 160 Check that the tow bar is fitted properly before each use Check the fo
140. boot Open right compartment ine B3T 0657 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 Open close compartment Superb gt Turn the bolts in direction of arrow Fig 91 Closing takes place in the reverse order The CD changer and TV tuner are located in the right compartment Fig 91 The first aid box can also be stored in this compartment Open and close compartment Superb Combi gt Pull the handle in the direction of the arrow Fig 92 Closing takes place in the reverse order The CD changer and TV Tuner are housed in this compartment Seats and useful equipment 87 The first aid box and warning triangle can also be stored in this compartment Side compartments in the boot with battery B3T 0702 Fig 93 Open compartment with battery Superb Superb Combi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 On some vehicles the battery is located in the left compartment page 209 Open close compartment Superb gt Unfasten the bolts eg with a coin or screwdriver in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 93 Closing takes place in the reverse order Open and close compartment Superb Combi gt For example insert a coin in the slot A and lift them in the arrow direction 2 Fig 93 The compartment opens in the direction of the arrow 3 gt Close compartment opposite to arrow direction 3
141. brush Work from the top to the bottom starting with the roof Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals Clean wheels door sills and similar parts last Use a second sponge for such areas Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois leath er CAUTION a When washing the car by hand protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts e g when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims etc Risk of cuts a Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle s paintwork Automatic car wash systems First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 189 The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system e g closing the windows and the sliding tilting roof etc Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 189 If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts such as a spoiler roof rack system two way radio aerial etc it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand After an automatic wash with wax treatment the lips of the wipers should be cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose and then de greased FI WARNING Fold in the exterior mirrors to prevent damage before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system Never man
142. bserve the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 Opening gt Lift button A on the front of the armrest and lift the storage compartment cov er in the direction of the arrow Fig 81 Closing gt Fold back the storage compartment lid in the opposite direction to that of the arrow Fig 81 until it clicks Rear seat backrest with through loading channel Fig 82 Rear seats Cover handle boot Unlock button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 After folding the rear armrest and cover up an opening in the seat backrest be comes visible through which the removable through loading bag with skis can be pushed The armrest and cover can be folded forward from the passenger com partment or the boot Opening from the passenger compartment gt Fold down the rear armrest Fig 61 on page 71 gt Pull the handle A pull up to the stop in the direction of the arrow and fold the cover down Fig 82 Opening from the boot gt Push the unlock button B Fig 82 in the direction of the arrow and fold the cover including the armrest forwards Seats and useful equipment 81 Closing gt Fold the cover and rear armrest upwards to the stop the cover must click into place Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing This is apparent as the red field above the unlocking button B Fig 82 is not visible from the boot E
143. bserve the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 The pockets intended for storage of maps magazines etc are provided on the reverse side of the front seat rests Fig 78 FI warnine Never put heavy items in the map pockets risk of injury CAUTION Never put large objects into the map pockets e g bottles or objects with sharp edges risk of damaging the pockets and seat coverings Storage compartment for umbrella Fig 79 Left rear door Stowage com partment for an umbrella B3T 0604 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 The storage compartment for an umbrella is located in the rear left door Fig 79 1 Note An umbrella can be purchased from SKODA Original Accessories Storage compartment in rear centre console Fig 80 Opening the storage compart ment B3T 0653 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 The storage compartment is equipped with a removable insert Open close gt Pull the handle A Fig 80 on the upper section of the recess and open out the compartment in the direction of the arrow Closing takes place in the reverse order EJ WARNING The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes risk of fire Storage compartment in rear armrest Fig 81 Opening the storage compart ment First read and o
144. by briefly pressing the button 1 Fig 116 on the multifunction steering wheel gt by briefly pressing the button on the adapter Fig 115 on page 111 Deactivating voice control GSM II If the system is currently playing a message the message that is currently being played will have to be stopped gt by briefly pressing the button on the adapter Fig 115 on page 11 gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel If the system expects a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself gt with the CANCEL voice command gt by pressing the button on the adapter Fig 115 on page 11 gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel Activating voice control GSM III The dialogue can be started at any time by pressing the button 1 Fig 116 on the multifunction steering wheel Deactivating voice control GSM III If the system is currently playing a message the message that is currently being played must be terminated by pressing the button 1 Fig 116 on the multi func tion steering wheel If the system expects a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself gt with the CANCEL voice command gt by briefly pressing the button 1 Fig 116 on the multifunction steering wheel Note a The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted a The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction
145. chnical alterations carried out by a specialist garage BE WARNING Continued a Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to operational faults This interference can also impair not directly affected sys tems because of the networking of the electronic components The operation al safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and can lead to increased wear of parts The KODA Partner accepts no liability for products that have not been ap proved by SKODA AUTO a s even though these may be products with an op erational approval or that have been approved by a government testing insti tute FJ warninc a We advise you only to use KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle Reliability safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts can be purchased from SKODA Partners who will also perform the professional assembly of the purchased parts SA For the sake of the environment Technical documents regarding alterations carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user in order to be handed over to the recyclers at a later date This ensures that the vehicle is recycled in an environmentally sound man ner Note Any damage caused by technical alterations made without the approval of the manufacturer is excluded from the warranty Service schedu
146. cle risk of accident New tyres 216 Unidirectional tyres 217 A WARNING Tyre pressure monitor 217 Spare wheel 218 Observe the following information regarding tyre damage and wear Full wheel trim 219 m Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age Wheelboks 219 a Never drive with damaged tyres risk of accident Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres Hubcaps aG a You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the Wheel bolts 220 wear indicators have been worn down Worn tyres impair necessary adhesion to the road surface particularly at g WARNING high speeds on wet roads This could lead to aquaplaning uncontrolled ve a The national legal regulations must be observed for the use of tyres hicle movement swimming on a wet road surface Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains and the maximum vehicle speed with snow chains a WARNING Observe the following information regarding the tyre inflation pressure a WARNING The tyre control display does not absolve the driver of the responsibility to ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure Check the tyre inflation pressure at regular intervals a Insufficient or excessive inflation pressure impairs handling risk of acci dent a f the inflation pressure is too low the tyre will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance This will cause a significant increase in the temperature of
147. connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth page 229 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Note We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be rapid charged by a specialist garage Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 209 On disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery the following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault free Operation Operating measure Electrical power window operational faults page 43 Panoramic sliding roof operational faults page 235 User manual of the radio or user manual of the naviga tion system Enter the radio navigation system code num ber Setting the clock page 12 Data in the multifunction display are deleted page 22 Note We recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist garage in order to en sure full functionality of all electrical systems Automatic load deactivation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 209 The vehicle voltage control unit automatically prevents the battery from discharg ing when the battery is put under high levels of strain This manifests itself by the following gt The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to the
148. ctivated when the electrical connection to the trailer is interrupted Always switch off the anti theft alarm system before a trailer is coupled or uncou pled page 35 Towing a trailer 165 Conditions for including a trailer in the anti theft alarm system J The vehicle is factory fitted with an anti theft alarm system and towing de vice v The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer sock et v The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional V The vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti theft alarm system is activated Note For technical reasons trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the an ti theft alarm system 166 Driving CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Safety equipment __ i Before setting off 167 What influences the driving safety 168 In this section you will find important information tips and notes on the subject of passive safety in your vehicle We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with for exam ple regarding seat belts airbags child seats and safety of children EJ warninec a This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants a You can find further information on safety concerning you and those travel ling with you in the following chapters of this owner s manual a The complete on boar
149. ctrical ap pliances page 77 12 volt power outlet Further information page 196 Modifications repairs and technical altera tions 76 Using the system Ashtray Fig 71 Centre console Ashtray at the front rear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 Removing inserting the front ash tray gt Open the ashtray Fig 67 on page 74 gt Grasp the ashtray insert in the area A Fig 71 and remove it in the direction of the arrow 1 Insertion takes place in the reverse order Removing inserting the rear ashtray insert gt Open the ashtray Fig 80 on page 81 gt Grasp the ashtray insert B Fig 71 in the area marked with the arrows and re move it in the direction of the arrow 2 Insertion takes place in the reverse order E WwARNING Never place flammable objects in the ashtray risk of fire i Note The ashtrays are fitted with an interior light which lights up when the parking light is on 12 volt power outlet Fig 72 Boot Superb Superb Combi socket First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 Overview of the 12 volt power socket In the front centre console A Fig 70 on page 76 In the rear centre console B Fig 70 on page 76 In the boot Fig 72 Using the power socket gt Remove the cover from power socket or cigarette lighter Fig 70 on page 760r open the cove
150. cular out of the reach of children risk of poisoning CAUTION a Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible Stains on the material leather panels and textiles Remove fresh stains such as those from ball point pens ink lipstick shoe pol ish etc from the material leather panels and textiles as quickly as possible Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel there is a risk of dam age to the dash panel 194 General Maintenance a Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows the rear side win dows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near the window aerial These may get damaged a Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush risk of damage to the surface of the panelling a Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature in side the vehicle is high a Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned a Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product SA For the sake of the environment Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regula tions Note 7 ana Due to the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any potential prob lems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle we recommend that cleaning and care of the inter
151. d literature should always be in the vehicle This ap plies in particular if you rent out or sell the vehicle Safety equipment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 167 The following list contains only part of the safety equipment in your vehicle gt Three point seat belts for all the seats gt Belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats gt Belt tensioner for front and outer rear seats gt Seat belt height adjusters for the front seats gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger gt Driver s knee airbag gt Front side airbags gt Rear side airbags gt Head airbags gt Anchoring points for child seats using the ISOFIX system gt Anchoring points for child seats using the TOP TETHER system gt Head restraints adjustable for height gt Adjustable steering column The specified safety equipment works together in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used If the seat belt is not fastened properly this may result in injuries if an airbag is activated in the event of an accident Before setting off First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 167 For your own sa
152. d opening 35 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 35 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn The interior monitor detects movements inside the car or the inclination of the ings on page 35 vehicle and then triggers the alarm Activating Switching off The anti theft alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds gt Switch off the ignition after the vehicle is locked gt Open the driver door gt Press the symbol button amp Fig 19 on the B pillar on the driver s side The lighting of the symbol in the button changes from red to orange gt Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safelock system or anti theft alarm system will be switched on This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally The interior monitor and the towing protection are activated automatically after Deactivating the vehicle is locked The anti theft alarm system is deactivated automatically after the vehicle is un Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possibility locked If the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds the anti theft alarm sys of the alarm being triggered by movements from e g children or animals within tem is automatically activated again
153. der with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in a clockwise direction to the stop Technical data CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Vehicle identification data 245 Dimensions 247 Vehicle specific information depending on engine type 248 Multi purpose vehicles AF 25 The details given in the vehicle s technical documentation always take prece dence over the details in the Owner s Manual The listed performance values were determined without performance reducing equipment e g air conditioning system Vehicle identification data RRCRRRAR BAKKE KX xxxxxx KA x KARXKKRK RA BAA EET RAN KRR HARA AA peakate Waua esol ad RARA RAR ASTOR 1D0 SSJ SRQ 1KD EF 1AT 3FA 1N3 INL HH7 4UF 4R4 B03 3AN 4X3 KH6 BRM 4A0 BZA JIL QI BGU 790 18D 8AL 8X0 4K3 BO3 7MJ QMO 3L3 9PS GIA 7X0 92V BWA if 7AA GOI LOL 7P4 FOA Fig 214 Vehicle data sticker type plate Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 245 Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker Fig 214 A is located on the base of the luggage com partment and is also fixed into the service schedule The vehicle data sticker contains the following data 1 Vehicle identification number VIN 2 Vehicle type 3 Gearbox code paint number interior equipment engine output engine code 4 Partial vehicle description 5 Operating weight in kg 6 Fuel consumpt
154. dex Towing device Description 160 Drawbar load 160 Use and care 163 Towing eye Front 231 Rear 231 Towing protection 36 Traction Control System ASR 148 Trailer 160 163 13 pin power socket 164 driving with a trailer 164 Loading 163 Safety eyelet 164 Trailer stabilisation 165 Transport Boot 82 Roof rack system 93 Transporting children safely 184 Triangle 221 Turn signal 50 TwinDoor see Tailgate 37 Two way radio systems 106 Tyre load bearing capacity See Wheels 216 Tyre pressure monitor Setting 217 Tyre repair Check pressure 228 Preparations 227 Sealing and inflating the tyre 227 Tyres 214 Inflation pressure 215 New 216 See Wheels 216 Sizes 215 Wear Indicator 215 U Umbrella Tray 80 Underbody protection 193 Unlock Car key 30 Individual settings 32 Remote Control 30 Unlocking KESSY 31 Unlocking and locking 29 Unlocking and locking the steering see KESSY 132 V Variable loading floor 88 Can be extended with aluminium strips 89 Dividing the boot 89 90 Removing 89 Removing and refitting 91 Vehicle battery Automatic load deactivation 213 charging 212 Checking the electrolyte level 211 Cover 211 Disconnecting and reconnecting 213 Operation in Winter 211 replacing 212 Safety instructions 209 Vehicle Condition see Auto Check Control 12 Vehicle data sticker 245
155. direction of the ar row Fig 189 Emergency equipment and self help 229 gt Connect the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power with the jump Starting point gt Attach the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power to a solid metal part firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself gt Start the engine gt After starting the engine close the protective cap of the jump starting point CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front towing eye 231 Rear towingeye __ 287 Vehicles with a towing device 231 Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised If the vehicle is raised at rear the automatic gearbox is damaged A tow bar is the safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks Only use a tow rope if a suitable tow bar is not available The following guidelines must be observed Driver of the tow vehicle gt Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accelera tor particularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox gt On vehicles with a manual transmission only push down on the accelerator pedal once the rope is taught The maximum towing speed is 50 km h Driver of the t
156. direction of the arrow 2 When you slide open the cover the vanity mirror lighting in the headliner A switches on automatically It switches off again when you Slide the cover closed or when you raise the sun visor On vehicles that are equipped with a double sun visor the auxiliary visor can be unfolded in the direction of the arrow 3 after swivelling the sun visor towards the door EJ warninec The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the deploy ment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them These objects might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed Sun screen Fig 44 Unroll the sun screen yr Y AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 58 The sun screen is located in the lower part of the boot cover Pulling out gt Pull the sun screen on the handle A Fig 44 and hang it in the magnetic brackets B Folding gt Remove the sun screen from the magnetic brackets B and hold it on the han dle A so that it can slowly roll up into the housing on the boot cover without being damaged i Note Do not place any objects that react sensitively to influences of magnetic fields watches electronics etc in the immediate vicinity of the magnetic brackets They can be damaged by the magnetic field Sun screen in the rear doors Fig 45 Rear door Sun screen Od J 83
157. e B column on the front passenger side Fig 160 The sticker is visible upon opening the front passenger door In some countries the sticker is affixed to the front pas senger sun visor a With child safety seats in groups 2 or 3 make sure that the loop around fit tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the same height as the loop around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side a As soon as the rear facing child seat is no longer being used on the passen ger seat the front passenger airbag should be re activated again Child safety and side airbag BNH 0113 Fig 161 Incorrect seated position of a child who is not properly secured risk from the side airbag child properly protected by child seat First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 184 The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side air bag Fig 161 A Transporting children safely 185 There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag so that the airbag can provide as much protection as possi ble Fig 161 B EI warnine a Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the side airbag risk of injury Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags risk of injury Classification of child seats First read and observe the introductory
158. e KESSY system Only convenience mode for the driver window or for all HoN oe of the windows can be adjusted here Activate deactivate the function for mirror lowering on Mirror down the front passenger side when engaging the reverse gear Activate deactivate the function for left and right exte rior mirror setting simultaneously Mirror adjust Factory setting Restore the Convenience factory setting a This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor b This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat Lights and Visibility The following functions can be activated deactivated or adjusted here Activate deactivate and adjust the light duration of the COMING HOME function Switch on off and adjust the light duration of the LEAVING HOME function Activate deactivate and adjust the footwell light inten sity Coming Home Leaving Home Footwell light Daytime running li Activate deactivate DAY LIGHT function ights Activate deactivate the function of the automatic rear window wiping Lane ch flash Activate deactivate the lane ch flash function Travel mode Activate deactivate the travel mode feature Factory setting Restore the factory setting for the lighting Time The time time format 12 or 24 hour indicator and the changeover between sum mer winter time can be set here Rear wiper Winter tyr
159. e adjustment wheel D to select the menu option Speed warning Information display or Segment display gt Press button B or the adjustment wheel D to activate the the speed limit set tings options gt Press button A or turn adjustment wheel D to set the desired speed limit e g 50 km h gt Confirm the speed limit by pressing button B or adjustment wheel D or wait around 5 seconds Your settings will then be saved automatically The speed limit can be adjusted from 30 km h to 250 km h in 5 km h increments Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving gt Press button A Fig 10 on page 23 or turn the adjustment wheel D to select the menu option Speed warning Information display or Segment display gt Drive at the desired speed e g 50 km h gt Press the button B or the adjustment wheel D to accept the current speed as the speed limit If you wish to change the set speed limit it is changed in 5 km h intervals e g the accepted speed of 47 km h increases to 50 km h or decreases to 45 km h gt Confirm the speed limit by pressing button B or adjustment wheel D or wait around 5 seconds Your settings will then be saved automatically Change or disable speed limit gt Press button A Fig 10 on page 23 or turn the adjustment wheel D to select the menu option Speed warning Information display or Segment display gt Press button B or adjustment wheel D to del
160. e and data its Bluetooth profile Electronic Stability Control Manual gearbox Multifunction display Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta tion of goods Newton meter measuring unit for the engine torque Personal Identification Number personal identification num ber for the connection of electronic devices using Bluetooth or WiFi Kilowatt measuring unit for the engine output Remote SIM Access Profile remote transmission of SIM data SSP simple security pairing connection of two devices using Blue tooth profile TDI CR Diesel engine with turbocharging and common rail injection system TDI PD Diesel engine with injection system and unit injector injection system TSI Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System the next evolu tion of the GSM network 3G WLAN Wireless Local Area Network wireless connection of elec tronic devices for data transfer WiFi Abbreviations 5 9 10 11 12 13 16 17 18 Fig 1 Cockpit 6 Using the system Using the system Overview hi 2 3 a 5 gt gt NI prg G pry G pary f e aR Eee S lallaE 3 a Electric windows Door opening lever on the driver s side Central locking system Air outlet vent on the driver s side Operating lever gt Turn signal light headlight and parking light headlight flasher gt Speed r
161. e approved for your vehicle are indicated in your vehicle documents Where possible replace tyres by axle Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels Explanation of tyre markings 205 55 R16 94 V What this means is Tyre width in mm Fig 173 on page 215 B Height width ratio in Fig 173 on page 215 B Code letter for the type of tyre Radial Fig 173 on page 215 Diameter of wheel in inches Fig 173 on page 215 B Load index V Speed symbol H The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall possibly on the inside e g DOT 10 13 means for example that the tyre was manufactured in the 10th week of 2013 Load index This indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual tyre 91 615 kg 92 630kg 93 650kg 94 670kg 95 690kg 97 730kg 99 775kg Speed symbol This indicates the maximum permissible vehicle speed with fitted tyres in each category 130 km h 160 km h 170 km h 180 km h 190 km h 200 km h 210 km h 240 km h 270 km h 300 km h lt sS lt TCANADAOS CAUTION The information about the load index and the speed symbol is listed in your vehi cle documents Unidirectional tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre The indicated direc
162. e films 192 De icing windows and exterior mirrors 192 Headlight lenses _ Ci Door lock cylinders 193 Cavity protection 193 Wheels 193 Underbody protection 193 Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle It may also be one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relat ing to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork We recommend using vehicle care products from SKODA Original Accessories These are available from SKODA Partners The usage instructions on the package must be observed F WARNING a Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions a Always store vehicle care products safely in particular out of the reach of children risk of poisoning Protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims risk of cuts CAUTION a Do not use any insect sponges rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning prod ucts risk of damaging the paintwork surface a Cleaner that contain solvents can damage the material being cleaned SA For the sake of the environment Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regula tions Note Due to the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any potential prob lems with the cleanin
163. e leaking electrolytic fluid can irritate the skin eyes and breath apparatus Immediately seek out fresh air and leave the vehicle If this is not possible open all windows and doors a If you swallow electrolytic fluid seek medical assistance immediately a f your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid immediately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water Then con sult a doctor immediately CAUTION Never mechanically fold in or fold back the exterior mirrors with the fold in func tion amp by hand as this will damage the electric drive 62 Using the system i Note a Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear window in the housing on the boot cover is not in use or the light striking the in terior rear view mirror is not affected by other objects a f the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off the exterior mirror dim ming is also switched off a Do not touch the surface of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is switched on a f the the electrical exterior mirror setting fails at any time the two mirrors can be adjusted by hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface a Contact a specialist garage if there is a fault with the power setting function for the exterior mirrors Interior mirror f Fig 47 4 Manual dimming interior mirror Fig 48 Automatic dimming mirror First read and observe
164. e locking button into the opening 2 using a flat screwdriver with a width of maximum 5 mm and pull out the head rest gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place F WARNING The head rests must be correctly adjusted to avoid risk of injury a Never drive with the head restraints removed risk of injury a f the rear seats are occupied the rear head rests must not be in the lower position Seats and useful equipment 67 Note The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions Memory function of electrically adjustable seat Fig 56 Memory buttons and SET button B3T 0683 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 65 The memory function for the driver s seat provides the option to store the posi tions of the driver s seat and the external mirrors Each of the three memory but tons B Fig 56 can be assigned a set position Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward gt Switch on the ignition gt Adjust the seat to the desired position gt Adjust both of the exterior mirrors page 64 gt Press the button SET A Fig 56 gt Within a after pressing the button press the desired memory button B An acknowledgment sound confirms the storage Saving front passenger mirror settings when reversing gt Switch on the ignition gt Press th
165. e on board literature contains the following terms relating to the service work for your vehicle gt Specialist garage a company that carries out specialist service tasks for SKODA vehicles gt KODA service partner a company that is contractually authorized by KODA AUTO a s to carry out service tasks for KODA vehicles gt KODA Partners a company that is authorized by KODA AUTO a s to sell SKODA products or carry out service work or to carry out these tasks in parallel The owner s manual This owner s manual describes all possible equipment variants without identify ing them as special equipment model variants or market dependent equipment Consequently this vehicle does not need to contain all of the equipment compo nents described in this owner s manual The level of equipment of your vehicle refers to your purchase contract of the ve hicle More information is available from the SKODA Partner from whom you bought the vehicle The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle they are only inten ded for general information The service schedule gt Contains vehicle data including information on service work carried out gt Is intended as proof of services carried out gt Is intended for records relating to the mobility warranty only valid for some countries gt Serves as a warranty certificate from the SKODA Partner where your vehicle was purchased Therefore p
166. e re sulting openings have not been properly sealed a Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed unless the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed a Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional loud speakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner door pan els a Always have work carried out by a KODA service partner or a professional specialist garage CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Deactivating airbags 181 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 182 Deactivating airbags Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 181 Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones below gt If using a rear facing child seat on the front passenger seat due to different le gal regulations the airbag must be deactivated if using a forwards facing child seat in some countries page 184 Transporting children safely gt If it is not possible to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest despite the driver s seat being correctly adjus ted Airbag system 181 gt If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a physical disability gt If different seats have been fitted e g orthopaedic seats without side airbags The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key o
167. e required memory button B Fig 56 gt Move the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control into position R page 64 gt Engage reverse gear gt Adjust the front passenger s mirror to the desired position page 64 gt Disengage reverse gear The set position of the exterior mirror is stored 68 Using the system Retrieving the saved setting gt Press the desired memory button B Fig 56 briefly with the ignition on or gt Press and hold the desired memory button B with the ignition off or when the ignition is on and travelling at a speed of more than 5 km h Stopping the ongoing adjustment gt Press any button on the driver s seat or the button 8 on the remote control key Note Each time new seat and exterior mirror settings for forward travel are saved the individual setting for the right exterior mirror for reverse travel must also be Saved again Memory function of the remote control key First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 65 The function of automatically storing the positions of the driver s seat and the external mirrors when the vehicle is locked can be activated in the memory of the remote control key When this function is activated the current positions of the driver s seat and the external mirrors are saved in the memory of the remote control key each time the vehicle is locked When the vehicle is next unlocked using the same key the d
168. e s braking distance risk of accident A Seat belt warning light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light 4 comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt The indicator light only goes out if the driver or front passenger has fastened his seat belt If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver or front passenger a perma nent warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km h and simulta neously the indicator light 4 flashes If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next 90 seconds the warning signal is deactivated and the indicator light A lights up permanently 14 Using the system t Generator First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 If the indicator light lights up amp when the engine is running the vehicle battery is not being charged Seek help from a specialist garage The electrical system requires checking EI warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Hazard warning light system CAUTION If the warning light amp cooling system fault comes on in addition to the warn ing light when driving stop the vehicle immediately a
169. e start Inspecting and replenishing 211 We recommend that you have the acid level checked regularly by a specialist ga rage especially in the following cases gt High external temperatures gt Longer day trips gt After each charge Winter time At low temperatures the vehicle battery only has part of the initial power output that it has at normal temperatures A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and if necessary re charged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter CAUTION For technical reasons on vehicles with the description AGM the electrolyte lev el cannot be checked Note The battery acid level is also checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the inspection service Charging a vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 209 A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine gt Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components gt Only when performing a quick charge disconnect both battery cables first negative then positive gt Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals red posi tive black negative gt Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the device gt After cha
170. e the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 95 Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents according to the setting of control dial and the outside atmospheric conditions The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 2 3 Fig 107 and 5 Fig 108 the outlets can be opened and closed individually 96 Using the system Changing the air flow direction gt To change the height of the air flow swivel the horizontal fins with the movable adjuster A Fig 107 or Fig 108 upward or downward gt To change the lateral direction of the air flow turn the vertical fins with the movable adjuster A Fig 107 or Fig 108 to the left or right Opening gt Turn wheel B Fig 107 or Fig 108 to position 2 Closing gt Turn wheel B Fig 107 or Fig 108 to position O An overview of the available settings for adjusting the direction of the air outlet Setting the direction of the air Active air outlet vents Do not cover the air outlet vents with objects of any kind Using the air conditioning system economically First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 95 The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the inte rior has
171. e the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 201 a Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not sufficiently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty by other road users Bulbs H7 H8 and H15 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb risk of injury We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb Gas discharge bulbs xenon bulbs operate with a high voltage professional knowledge is required risk of death a The relevant lamp must always be switched off before a light bulb is re placed CAUTION Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb Use a clean cloth nap kin or similar a When removing and installing the number plate light and tail light make sure that the paintwork of the vehicle and the tail light are not damaged i Note a This Owner s Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising Other bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage a We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehi cle Replacement bulbs can be purchased from SKODAOriginal Accessories We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage af ter replacing a bulb in the main low or fog bea
172. e time Starting off and Driving 133 Emergency engine start Fig 124 Emergency start up of engine e l D A First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 131 If the authorisation check for the key fails the following message appears in the instrument cluster display Key not found NOKEY The emergency start up must be completed gt Press the starter button Fig 124 and then hold the key to the starter button or gt Press the starter button directly with the key During an emergency start up of the engine the key bit must face the starter button Fig 124 Emergency ignition shut off system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 131 In an emergency it is possible to switch off the ignition even at speeds greater than 2 km h by using the emergency ignition shutoff system gt Press the starter button Fig 123 on page 132 for longer than 1 second or twice within 1 second 134 Driving CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Information for braking S14 Handbrake 135 EI warnine Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switched off risk of accident a The clutch pedal must be actuated when braking on a vehicle with manual transmission when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs Otherwise the func tion of the brake b
173. ease the brake pedal Start the engine by pressing the gas pedal or by choosing a different gear and releasing the brake pedal If the selector lever is moved into position R during the STOP phase the engine will re start No automatic engine shutdown takes place when the vehicle is moving at low speed e g during a traffic jam or when tuning and remains stationary after pressing the brake pedal lightly Automatic engine shutdown takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force System operating conditions First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 156 The START STOP system is very complex Some of the procedures are hard to check without servicing No engine shut down is carried out Before each STOP phase the system checks whether certain conditions have been met No engine shut down takes place in the following situations gt The engine has not reached the minimum temperature for the START STOP mode gt The temperature inside the vehicle has not reached the temperature set in the air conditioning system gt The external temperature is very low high gt The intensive windscreen heater Climatronic or windscreen heater ventilation is switched on with the maximum air temperature setting manual air condition ing system gt The parking aid Park Assist is switched on gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low gt The stationary vehicle is on a ste
174. ection system The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a specialist garage ov Glow plug system diesel engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light 07 comes on after the ignition has been switched on The en gine can be started immediately after the pre glow indicator light goes out There is a fault in the glow plug system if the indicator light 7 does not come on at all or lights up continuously If the indicator light oo begins to flash while driving a fault exists in the engine control The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a specialist garage 18 Using the system EPC EPC fault light petrol engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 If the indicator light EP lights up there is a fault in the engine control The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a specialist garage gt Diesel particle filter diesel engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust The soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a reg ular basis If the indicator light lights up soot has accumulated in the diesel partic
175. ed off If the display is not switched on using the Pe symbol button until the driver drives past the parking space the system can assess and display this parking space Finding a parallel parking space gt Drive past the parking space at up to 40 km h and a distance of 0 5 1 5 m gt Press the Pe Fig 138 symbol button once The following is shown in the information display of the information clus ter Fig 138 B Finding a perpendicular parking space gt Drive past the parking space at up to 20 km h and a distance of 0 5 1 5 m gt Press the Pe Fig 138 symbol button twice The following is shown in the information display of the information clus ter Fig 138 c The search area for the parking space on the front passenger s side is automati cally shown in the instrument cluster display Activate the turn signal on the driver s side if you wish to park on this side of the road The search area for the parking space on the driver s side is shown in the instrument cluster display 152 Driving If suitable parking space is found its parameters are stored until another suitable parking space has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been driven after finding the parking space To change the parking mode when searching for a parking space press the Pe symbol button again Parking 0 eee Fig 139 Displays in the instrument cluster display First read and observe t
176. ed or filled if additional loud speakers or other equipment parts have been installed in the inner door pan els This chapter contains information on the following subjects Refuelling 199 Unleaded petrol 200 Diesel fuel 200 The correct grades of fuel for your vehicle are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 164 on page 199 B E WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canister in the vehicle We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehi cle for safety reasons in the event of an accident these canisters can become damaged and fuel may escape risk of fire LT CAUTION a Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and the exhaust system Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle s paintwork risk of paint damage B3T 0525 Fig 164 Open fuel filler flap fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 199 Before refuelling switch off the auxiliary heating system auxiliary heating and ventilation page 104 gt Press on the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow Fig 164 A gt Unscrew the filler cap by turning it in a counterclockwise direction and place the cap onto the top o
177. ed to suit your particular needs gt Repeatedly pressing the symbol button on the left or right reduces or increa ses blower speed If the blower is switched off the Climatronic system is switched off The set blower speed is displayed above the symbol button when the respec tive number of indicator lights come on EJ warnine a Stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary a Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up Defrosting windscreen mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 100 Switching on gt Press the symbol button max Fig 110 on page 100 gt Press the symbol button Fig 110 on page 100 Switching off gt Press the symbol button max again or press the symbol button AUTO gt Press the symbol button again More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 Fig 107 on page 96 The temperature control is controlled automatically CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Switching on off 104 Radio remote control 105 Conditions for the functioning of auxiliary heating Aux heating and ventilation hereinafter referred to only as auxiliary heating Aux heating The charge state of the vehicle b
178. eel Only use the spare wheel for as long as is necessary Never drive with more than one spare wheel attached The snow chains cannot be used on the spare wheel CAUTION a f a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres the following must be observed page 218 Spare wheel a Protect the tyres from contact with oil grease and fuel a Replace lost valve caps a If in the event of a puncture it is necessary to fit a spare wheel with a tyre without a dedicated running direction or with the opposite direction of rotation drive carefully as the optimal characteristics of the tyre are no longer applicable in this situation SA For the sake of the environment Tyres that are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption Note a We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe cialist garage a We recommend that you use wheel rims tyres full wheel trims and snow chains from SKODA Original Accessories Service life of tyres Fig 173 Principle sketch Tyre tread with wear indicators open fuel filler flap with a table detailing the tyre sizes and tyre inflation pressures Fig 174 Replacing wheels First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 The service life of tyres depends on the inflation pressure driving style and other circumstances Following the advice below can extend the service life of your tyres
179. eel differ from the fit ted tyres never drive faster than 80 km h or 50 mph Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering CAUTION Observe the instructions on the warning sign of the temporary spare wheel Full wheel trim First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 Pulling off gt Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge of the wheel trim gt Push the wheel wrench through the clamp support on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim Install gt Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening gt Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks cor rectly in place CAUTION a Use the pressure of your hand only do not strike the full wheel trim Avoid heavy impacts when the trim has not yet been inserted into the wheel rim This could cause damage to the guide and centring elements of the trim a Make sure that the anti theft wheel bolt is mounted in the bore in the area near the valve page 225 Securing wheels against theft a f wheel trims are retrofitted it must be ensured that an adequate flow of air is assured to cool the brake system Wheel bolts Fig 177 Remove the cap First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 Pulling off gt Push the extraction pliers page 222 sufficiently far onto the cap
180. eering wheel 129 Storage compartment in rear centre console 81 Storage compartment on the passenger side __ 79 Storage compartments 73 Storage compartment under the passenger seat _ 79 Storage pockets on the front seats 80 Storing skis 81 Sun screen 8D Sun screen in the rear doors 59 Sun visors 58 Switching lights on and off 48 Switching off the engine Key 131 see KESSY 133 Switching off the ignition see KESSY 133 Switching on the ignition see KESSY 133 T Tailgate 36 37 Automatic locking 38 TwinDoor 37 Warning light 15 Index 259 Taking care of the vehicle Natural leather 194 Seat belts 196 Taking care of your vehicle 189 Alcantara 195 Artificial leather 195 Automatic car wash system 189 Cavity protection 193 Chrome parts 192 Cleaning the wheels 193 Decorative films 192 Door lock cylinders 193 Fabric 195 Fabric covers 195 Headlight lenses 192 High pressure cleaner 190 Plastic parts 191 Polishing the paintwork 191 Rubber seals 191 Taking care of the interior 194 Taking care of your vehicle exterior 190 Washing 189 Washing by hand 189 Wash system 189 Wax treatment 191 Technical data 245 Telephone 109 112 Through loading bag 82 Through loading channel 81 Tilting roof see Electric sliding tilting roof 44 Tiptronic 138 Tool 222 TOP TETHER 188 Tow bar Checking secure attachment 162 Fitting 161 Ready position 161 Removing 162 Towing 230 Towing a trailer 160 260 In
181. egulating system Steering wheel gt With horn gt With driver s front airbag gt with pushbuttons for radio navigation system and mobile phone Instrument cluster Instruments and indicator lights Operating lever gt Information system gt Windscreen wiper and wash system Air outlets in the central part of the dash panel Regulator for front left seat heating Button for hazard warning light system Regulator for front right seat heating Depending on equipment fitted gt Radio gt Navigation system Storage compartment on the front passenger side Front passenger airbag Air outlet vent on the front passenger side Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag in front passenger storage compartment Door opening lever on the front passenger side Electric exterior mirror adjustment 178 107 124 BANAAN NE 32 Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag ___ B3 Light switch Bonnet release lever Regulator for the instrument lighting and regulator for the head light beam range adjustment Storage compartment on the driver s side Lever for adjusting the steering wheel Driver s knee airbag Ignition lock Pedals Handbrake Bars with buttons depending on the equipment fitted amp START STOP Tyre control display ASR Traction control TCS amp Electronic Stability Co
182. electrical system gt Where necessary large convenience consumers such as seat heaters and rear window heaters have their power limited or are shut off completely in the event of an emergency CAUTION Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management the vehi cle battery may be drained For example when the ignition is switched on a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned on during longer parking Consumers that are supplied via a 12 V power socket can cause the vehicle bat tery to discharge when the ignition is switched off Note Driving comfort is not impaired by consumers being deactivated The driver is of ten not aware of it having taken place Inspecting and replenishing 213 dent a Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged immediately re oo duce your speed and stop If no external damage is evident drive slowly and Introduction carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle checked Only use tyres or wheel rims that have been approved by KODA for your model of vehicle Failure to observe this instruction may impair the road safety a Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling risk of acci This chapter contains information on the following subjects Service life of tyres 215 of your vehi
183. em Changing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 208 Brake fluid absorbs moisture Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the environment Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake sys tem The water content lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications gt VW 50714 gt FMVSS 116 DOT4 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Battery cover 211 Checking the battery electrolyte level 211 Charging a vehicle battery 212 Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery 213 Automatic load deactivation 213 Warning symbols on the vehicle battery Symbol Always wear eye protection Battery acid is severely caustic Always wear gloves and eye protec tion Keep fire sparks open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the ve hicle battery gt Inspecting and replenishing 209 Importance produced When charging the vehicle battery a highly explosive gas mixture is Keep children away from the vehicle battery Improper handling of the battery can lead to damage We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a specialist garage EI WARNING There is risk of injuries poisoning chemical burns explosions or fire when working on the battery a
184. emains out doors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight it can take sev eral hours until the internal temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the START STOP system a If Climatronic is running in automatic mode the engine may not switch off auto matically under certain conditions Starting shutting down the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 156 Vehicles with manual transmission gt Stop the vehicle where necessary apply the handbrake gt Put the gear stick into Neutral gt Release the clutch pedal Automatic engine shut down STOP phase takes place The warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster display gt Depress the clutch pedal The automatic start procedure takes place again START phase The warning symbol goes out Vehicles with automatic transmission gt Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal Automatic engine shut down takes place The warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster display gt Release the brake pedal The automatic start procedure takes place again The warning symbol goes out Further information on automatic transmission Engine shut down takes place when the selector lever is in positions P D S and N and in Tiptronic mode When the selector lever is in position P the engine remains shut down even after you rel
185. ems can be selected from the Settings menu item Telephone book Phonebook Update Read in the phone book Select memory Select memory with phone contacts SIM amp phone Download the contacts of the SIM card and the phone SIM card Download the contacts from the SIM card Mobile phone Initial setting to also import contacts from the SIM card it is necessary to switch to the SIM amp phone menu item List Arrange the entries in the phone book Surname Arrange according to surname First name Arrange according to first name Own number Optionally display your own telephone number on the display of the device of the person you are calling this function is network dependent Network depnd Network dependent own number display Yes Allow display of your own number No Prohibit display of your own number Signal settings Signal settings a Ring tone Ring tone setting Volume Volume settings Turn vol up Increase volume Turn vol down Decrease volume Phone settings Phone settings Select operator Select operator Automatic Automatic operator selection Manual Manual operator selection Network mode Network mode m UMTS UMTS GSM GSM Automatic Automatic SIM mode Applies to telephones with the rSAP profile that simultaneously support the operation of two SIM cards there is an option to choose which SIM card to connect to the hands free system SIM mode 1 SIM 1 is con
186. en de ployed 176 Safety System description First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the indicator light 2 in the instrument cluster page 19 When the airbags are deployed they fill with gas and inflate A grey white or red non harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment the airbag system consists of the following modules gt Electronic control unit gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger page 178 gt Driver s knee airbag page 179 gt Side airbags page 179 gt Head airbags page 180 gt Airbag warning light in the instrument cluster page 19 gt Key switch for the front passenger airbag page 182 gt Warning light for the front passenger airbag deactivation activation in the mid dle of the dash panel page 182 bil Note a The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life If you sell your vehicle provide the complete vehicle documentation to the new owner Please note that the information relating to the possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag must be included a When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system it is important to com ply with the national legal requirements Airbag deployment F
187. ep slope or a steep downhill section gt The idling speed is too high gt The steering angle is too large manoeuvring gt The selector lever position R is selected e g when parking Assist systems 157 The warning symbol amp appears in the instrument cluster display The automatic start procedure takes place again During the STOP phase the engine fires up without any active driver intervention e g in the following situations gt The vehicle begins to roll e g on a slope gt The difference between the temperature setting of the air conditioning system and the inside temperature is too large gt The intensive windscreen heater Climatronic or windscreen heater ventilation is switched on with the maximum air temperature setting manual air condition ing system gt The brake pedal was pressed several times the pressure in the braking system is too low gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low gt The current consumption is too high Manually activating deactivating the system Fig 141 Button for the START STOP sys tem First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 156 Activation deactivation gt Press the symbol button amp Fig 141 When start stop mode is deactivated the indicator light in the button lights up i Note If the system is deactivated during the STOP phase the automatic start proce dure takes place 158 Dri
188. er gt The indicator light lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switch ed on and then flashes for around 12 seconds The following message appears in the information display Airbag belt tensioner deactivated If the air bag was switched off using the key operated switch on the side of the dash panel on the passenger side gt The indicator light comes on for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on gt The deactivated air bag is indicated by the illumination of the warning light page 182PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF in the middle of the dash panel EJ warnine If there is a fault have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident 1 Tyre control display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light 1 lights up if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one of the tyres Check and adjust the pressure in all tyres page 215 Service life of tyres Instruments and Indicator Lights 19 If the indicator light 1 lights up there is a fault in the system If a turn signal light fails the indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate Seek help from a specialist garage Switching off the hazard indicator light system is switched on will cause all of the Further information page 217 Tyre pressure monito
189. er as possible gets into the lock ing cylinders Cavity protection First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory This wax protection does not need to be inspected or re applied If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures these must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petroleum cleaner EJ WARNING Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re move wax risk of fire Wheels First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 Wheel rims Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular ba Sis Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion otherwise the rim material will be cor roded Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately Light alloy wheels After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product for light alloy wheels Products which cause abrasion must not be used to treat the wheel rims CAUTION Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which in certain circumstances can cause premature wear of the steering
190. er door trim panel Fig 40 E CAUTION The light switches on off when the front door is opened or closed Vehicles without this warning light have only a reflector at this point E i Sng E E E EEEE A A i Note i Note If the door is open and the ignition switched off the light will extinguish auto matically after around 20 minutes a lf the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder it does not light up when the boot lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not charged a If the lamp is not switched off and it is correctly inserted in the holder the bulbs Entry lighting in the front part C Fig 41 on page 57 of the lamp are automatically switched off E Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 54 The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror and illumi nates the entry area of the front door The light comes on after the vehicle has been unlocked or on opening the front door The lighting goes out about 30 seconds after the doors are closed or if the ignition is switched on E WARNING If the entry light is on do not touch its cover risk of burns 56 Using the system Removable lamp lt y o B3T 0618 Fig 41 Removeable lamp First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 56 A removable lamp is fitted on the left side of the boot This lamp has two func tions gt lighting the boot
191. es Here you can set the speed at which an audible signal should sound This func tion is for example used for winter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum speed of the vehicle When exceeding the speed the following is shown on the information display Winter tyres max speed km h Units of measurement The units for the temperature consumption and distance driven can be set here Assistants The tones of the audible signals for the parking aid can be adjusted here Information system 2 7 Alt speed dis The display of the second speed in mph or in km h can be switched on here Service Here you can have the remaining kilometres and days until the next service inter val displayed and reset the Service Interval Display Factory setting The information display is returned to its factory settings by selecting the Factory setting menu Note If the information display is not activated at that moment the menu always shifts to the man settings Settings after approx 10 seconds 28 Using the system Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Car key 30 Locking unlocking with remote control 30 Unlocking locking KESSY 31 Safe securing system 32 Individual settings 32 Locking unlocking the vehicle from the inside 33 Child safety lock 33 Opening closing a door 34 Your car is equipped with a central locking system
192. ess the Pe Fig 138 on page 152 symbol button once gt Activate the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out of which you wish to manoeuvre gt Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R gt As soon as the following is shown in the information cluster display Steering interv active Monitor area around veh let go of the steering wheel The steering will be taken over by the system gt Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully gt Follow the instructions of the system shown in the instrument cluster display As soon as the manoeuvring procedure is completed an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display O Steering interv finished Please take over steering Automatic termination The system terminates the manoeuvring procedure if one of the following cases arises gt Speed of 7 km h exceeded during the departing procedure gt System button pressed gt TCS system switched off gt Intervention of the driver in the automatic steering procedure stops the steer ing wheel gt There is a system fault system temporarily not available gt Automatic braking for damage limitation If any of the above events occurs the following warning message is dis played page 154 Automatic brake assist First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 151
193. ete the speed limit gt Press button B or adjustment wheel D again to activate change mode for the speed limit If the set speed limit is exceeded an audible signal will sound as a warning At the same time the display shows the menu Speed warning Information display or Segment display with the set threshold The set speed limit value remains stored even after switching off the ignition Information system 25 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Mainmenu 2 Settings 27 The information display provides you with information on the current operating state of your vehicle The information system also provides you with data relating to the radio mobile phone multifunction display navigation system the unit con nected to the MDI port and the automatic gearbox page 136 EI warnine Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Main menu mc gt SN B3T 0667 Fig 12 Information display Control elements on the windscreen wiper lev er control elements on the multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 26 Operating with the buttons on the windscreen wiper lever gt Press and hold rocker switch A Fig 12to activate the MAIN MENU 26 Using the system gt Individual menu items can be selected by mean
194. etely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and the exhaust system Note After filling up it can occur that during dynamic driving e g numerous Curves braking driving downhill and climbing a steep hill the fuel gauge indicates ap prox a fraction less When stopping or during less dynamic driving the fuel gauge displays the correct fuel level again This is not a fault Counter for distance driven Ge eo Fig 6 trip km A Segment display information display krr First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 B3T 0689 Daily trip counter trip The daily trip counter A Fig 6 indicates the distance which you have driven since it was last reset in steps of 100 metres or 1 10 of a mile Reset trip counter for the distance driven gt Press and hold the 7 Fig 2 on page 8 button Odometer The odometer B Fig 6 indicates the total distance the vehicle has travelled Note For vehicles fitted with the information display if the display of the second speed is activated in mph or km h this driving speed is indicated instead of the counter for the total distance driven Service Interval Display Fig 7 Service Interval Display Note 10 LA 184 20 a v al 4 2i km 7 4 g g km B3T 0666 AA First read and observe the introductory
195. etrol and diesel engines is practically identical Radiator fan First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 201 After switching off the ignition the fan may intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes Inspecting and replenishing 203 The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor Operation is controlled accord ing to the temperature of the coolant Windscreen washer system Fig 167 Engine compartment Wind screen washer fluid reservoir B3T 0422 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 201 The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the adap tive headlights The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 5 5 litres on vehicles that have a headlight cleaning system Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights We recommend using clean water together with a screen cleaner from the range of SKODA Original Accessories with antifreeze in winter which will remove any stubborn dirt In Winter the washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze even if the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles Under exceptional circumstances methylated spirits can also be used if no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available The concentration of methylated spirits mu
196. f deviations such as the car beginning to skid the ESC system will automatically brake the appropriate wheel During an intervention of the system the indicator light amp flashes in the instru ment cluster The following systems are integrated into the Electronic Stability Control ESC gt Antilock Brake System ABS page 148 gt Traction control ASR page 148 gt Electronic Differential Lock EDL page 148 gt Driver Steering Recommendation DSR page 148 gt Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA page 149 gt Hill Hold Control HHC page 149 gt Trailer stabilisation TSA page 160 Towing a trailer The ESC system cannot be deactivated The amp Fig 134 symbol button can only be used to deactivate the ASR A The warning light amp lights up in the instrument cluster when the ASR is deactiva ted Assist systems 147 Antilock Braking System ABS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 147 ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking Thus helping the driver to main tain control of the vehicle The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises When the ABS system is active do not brake periodically or reduce the pressure on the brake pedal Traction Control System ASR Fig 135 TCS button First read and observe the introductory information and safety
197. f necessary through the relevant functions Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors gt Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses gt Avoid a bad pronunciation gt Close the doors windows and sliding roof to reduce or stop disturbing exterior noise D Not valid for vehicles with the Columbus navigation system 120 Using the system gt You are recommended to speak louder at higher speeds so that the sound of your voice is not drowned out by the increased ambient noise gt During the dialogue limit additional noise in the vehicle e g passengers talking at the same time gt Do not speak if the system makes an announcement The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and direc ted to the driver and front passenger Therefore the driver and the front passen ger can operate the equipment Entering a phone number The telephone number can be entered as a continuous series of individually spo ken digits the whole number at once or in the form of digital blocks separated by short pauses After each order of digits separation through brief voice pause all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system The digits O 9 symbols gt are permitted The system detects no continuous digit combinations such as twenty three but only individually spoken digits two three Activating voice control GSM II gt
198. f the fuel filler flap Fig 164 B gt Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time ff gt Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler tube and put it back in the pump gt Insert the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and screw it in a clockwise direction until it clicks into place gt Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly CAUTION The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time provided the nozzle has been operated properly Do not continue filling the fuel tank otherwise the expansion volume is filled up Inspecting and replenishing 199 gt Note The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres containing a reserve of approx 10 5 litres Unleaded petrol First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 199 Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol complying with the EN 228 standard in Germany also DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with an oc tane rating of 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with an octane rating 95 RON and 98 RON Prescribed fuel unleaded fuel 95 91 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON Unleaded petrol 91 RON can al so be used but results in a slight loss in performance
199. f your vehicle Only use the hands free system to the extent that you are in full control of your vehicle in any traffic situation a The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be ob served i Note We recommend that the installation of mobile phones and two way radio sys tems in a vehicle be carried out by a SKODA Service Partner a Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth communication are compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM III Ask a KODA Part ner whether your phone is compatible with the universal telephone preparation GSM Il or GSM III a The range of the Bluetooth connection to the hands free system is restricted to the vehicle interior The range is dependent on local factors e g obstacles be tween the devices and mutual interferences with other devices If your mobile phone is in a jacket pocket for example this can lead to difficulties when estab lishing a connection with the hands free system or transferring data Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel BIT 0004 Fig 113 Multifunction steering wheel Control buttons for the telephone Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 106 To minimize driver distraction when operating the telephone the basic tele phone s functions can be set by simply operating the buttons located on the steering wheel Fig 113 This applies only if your vehicle has been equi
200. fety and the safety of the people travelling with you please pay attention to the following points before setting off gt Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly gt Check the tyre inflation pressure gt Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside gt Secure all items of luggage page 82 Boot gt Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals gt Adjust the mirrors the front seat and head restraint to your body size gt Advise your passengers to adjust the head restraints to their body size gt Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts page 184 Transporting children safely gt Adopt the correct seated position page 168 Correct seated position Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position gt Correctly fasten the seat belt Also inform passengers to fasten the seat belt correctly page 171 Passive Safety 167 What influences the driving safety First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 167 The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants If your driving safety is effected you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk The following guidelines must therefore be observed gt Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation e g by your passengers or mobile phone calls gt Never drive when your driving ab
201. fety warn ings H on page 8 The time and the outside temperature is displayed on the display in the rear cen tre console when the ignition is switched on Fig 8 The values are taken over by the instrument cluster Auto Check Control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 Vehicle condition Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked contin uously when the ignition is switched on and also while driving 12 Using the system Some error messages and other information are displayed in the information dis play The messages are displayed simultaneously with the symbols in the infor mation display or with the warning lights in the instrument cluster page 13 The Vehicle status menu item is displayed in the menu if there is at least one er ror message After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is dis played Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e g 1 3 This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is being dis played Warning symbols Engine oil pressure too low page 14 Clutches of the automatic gearbox are too hot page 12 Check engine oil level sraosi engine oil sensor faulty Thickness of brake pads page 20 Problem with engine oil pressure page 12 Clutches of the automatic gearbox are too hot i A symbol in the information display
202. free system is visible to other devices GSM II GSM IlI when connected via the HFP profile A phone is connected with the hands free system GSM IIl when connected via the rSAP profile The hands free system is visible to other devices GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile A multimedia unit is connected to the hands free system GSM II GSM III A UMTS network is available GSM III Internet connection via the hands free system GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile a This function is only supported by some mobile phones 108 Using the system Phone Phonebook Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 106 A phone phonebook is part of the hands free system This phone phonebook can be used depending on the type of mobile phone After the telephone s first connection to the hands free system the phone book from the phone and the SIM card loads into the hands free memory Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands free system an update of the relevant phone book is performed The updating can take a few minutes During this period the available phone book is the one stored at the previous update Newly stored telephone numbers are only shown after the updating has ended The update is interrupted if a telephone event e g incoming or outgoing call voice control dialogue occurs during the updating procedure After the telephone event has ended
203. from the electrical system Do not smoke a Never work near open flames a Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby 202 General Maintenance EI warnine a Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid con tainers a Keep fluids in their original containers and keep securely out of the reach of children a f you intend to work underneath the vehicle you must secure the vehicle from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks the car jack is not sufficient risk of injury a Never cover the engine with additional insulation material e g with a cover risk of fire a The bonnet must always be properly closed when driving Therefore the lock must always be checked after closing the bonnet in order to ensure that it has engaged properly a If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving stop the ve hicle immediately and close the bonnet risk of accident CAUTION a Always top up using the correct specification of fluids This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage a Never open the bonnet using the locking lever Fig 165 on page 203 SA For the sake of the environment In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids and the specials tools and knowledge required for such work we recommend that flu ids be changed by a specialist garage as part of an inspection service Note a Please con
204. ft pattern of 5 gear or 6 gear manual gearbox i A 3 a s 4 N wf Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 136 Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down This prevents uneven wear on the clutch Observe the recommended gear page 22 Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary Depress the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed Wait a moment before reverse gear is engaged to avoid any shift noises The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged provided the igni tion is on E WARNING Never engage reverse gear when driving risk of accident 136 Driving l CAUTION If not in the process of changing gear do not leave your hand on the gearshift lever while driving The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mecha nism to wear excessively m Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 136 The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances In the driver s footwell only a footmat which is attached to the two correspond ing attachment points may be used Only use factory supplied footmats or footmats from the range of SKODAOriginal Accessories which are fitted to two attachment points E WARNING No objects may be placed in the driver s footwell risk due to obstruction or limitation of pedal operation m This chapter contains information on the following subjects
205. g Seats y 66 Aerial 189 AFS 51 Airbag 176 Deactivating 181 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 182 Deployment 176 Front airbag 178 Head airbag 180 Knee airbag 179 Modifications and damage to the airbag system 198 Side airbag 179 Airbag system 176 Air conditioning system Air outlets 96 Climatronic 100 Manual air conditioning system 97 Air outlets 8G Alarm Switching off 35 Triggering 35 Anti theft alarm system Activating deactivating 36 Trailer 165 Antilock Braking System 148 Armrest Front 71 Rear 71 81 Artificial leather 195 Ashtray 76 ASR Operation 148 Warning light 16 Assist systems 147 ABS 17 148 ASR 16 148 Cruise control system 155 DSR 148 EDL 148 ESC 17 147 HBA 149 HHC 149 Park assist 151 Parking aid 149 START STOP 156 Auto Check Control 12 Automatic driving lamp control 50 Automatic gearbox Selector lever emergency unlocking 234 Automatic load deactivation 213 Automatic retractable cargo cover Superb Combi 87 Automatic transmission 136 Kickdown 139 Manual gear changing on the multifunction steering wheel 138 Operational faults 139 Selector lever lock 138 Selector lever operation 137 Starting off and driving 138 Tiptronic 138 AUX IN Installation in the storage compartment 77 Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventila tion 103 Radio remote co
206. g 209 F WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment page 201 Do not continue your journey if the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking there is a risk of an accident Seek help from a specialist garage Do not use used brake fluid the function of the brake system may be im paired risk of accident CAUTION Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle Di Note The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service Checking the level Fig 170 Engine compartment Brake fluid reservoir First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 208 The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir Fig 170 The level must be between the MIN and MAX markings A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear and tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system however if the fluid lev el drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the MIN marking If the brake fluid level is too low this is indicated by the indicator light lighting up in the instrument cluster page 14 Braking syst
207. g and care of the interior of your vehicle we recommend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA service partner Taking care of your vehicle s paintwork First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 190 Minor paint damage such as scratches scuffs or stone chips should be treated im mediately if possible using touch up pens or sprays Preserving the vehicle paintwork A thorough wax treatment provides the vehicle s paintwork with highly effective protection against harmful environmental influences The vehicle must be treated with a high quality hard wax polish at the latest when no more drops form on the clean paintwork A new layer of a high quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body work after it has dried thoroughly Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax Polishing Polishing is necessary if the vehicle s paintwork has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives If the polish does not contain any preserving elements the paint must be treated with a preservative afterwards CAUTION a Never apply wax to the windows a Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or hard waxes Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment risk of paint scr
208. g connected must support the Bluetooth A2DP profile refer to CD change 126 the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected a DVD preinstallation 1268 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 124 The universal telephone preinstallation makes it possible to play back music via Bluetooth from devices such as MP3 players mobile phones or notebooks Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 124 The multifunction steering wheel comprises buttons for setting the basic func tions for the factory fitted radio and navigation system Fig 117 The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices A description is included in the relevant operating instructions If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated B5E 0096 l l The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio audio Fig 117 Multifunction steering wheel control buttons video or navigation system The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons gt 124 Using the system Button Action Press Change audio source Press Switch tone off on MUTE 4 Interrupt current navigation an nouncement Turn upwards Increase the volume Turn downwards Decrease the volume Press briefly Skip to next channel Skip to ne
209. g system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 59 After the ignition is turned on headlamps are always cleaned at the first and after every tenth spraying of the windscreen 5 Fig 46 on page 60 when the low beam or high beam is switched on To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter any snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be cleared with a de icing spray CAUTION Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand risk of damage Lights and visibility 61 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Interior mirror BBB Additional interior mirror 63 External mirrors 64 E WARNING a Make sure that the mirror is not covered by ice snow mist or other objects Convex curved outward exterior mirrors increase the field of vision They do however make objects appear smaller in the mirror These mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the following vehi cles Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to the following vehicles a The illuminated display of an external navigation unit can lead to operation al faults to the automatic dimming interior mirror risk of accident E WARNING Automatic dimming mirrors contain an electrolytic fluid which may leak should the mirror glass break a Th
210. g textiles Seat covers First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 194 Electrically heated seats Do not clean the covers by moistening as this can damage the seat heating sys tem Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 195 Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers Seats without seat heating Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning products specially designed for this purpose Indented points arising on the fabrics by everyday use can be removed by brush ing against the direction of hair with a damp brush Always clean all parts of the covers so that there are no visible edges Then allow the seat to dry completely CAUTION a Regularly remove dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner a Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning by switching on the heater a Do not sit on wet seats risk of seat deformation a Always clean the seats from seam to seam Seat belts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 The belt webbing must always be kept clean Wash dirty seat belts with mild soapy water Remove coarse dirt with a soft brush Dirty belt webbing may impair the correct functioning of the inertia reel FI WARNING The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning a
211. gs on page 230 On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device there is no mount for the screw in towing eye behind the cap Emergency equipment and self help 231 Use the built in detachable ball rod for towing page 160 Towing device Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to us ing the towing eye If the towing device is removed completely it must be replaced with the standard reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the towing eye If this procedure is not observed the vehicle may not meet the national legal pro visions CAUTION The detachable ball rod and or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable tow bar is used i Note The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for towing if necessary CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Replacing the battery in the remote control key 232 Synchronising the remote control 233 Replace the battery in the remote control of the heater heater ____ s 2 333 CAUTION a The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original bat tery a When replacing the battery pay attention to the correct polarity SA For the sake of the environment Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions 232 Do it yourself Replacing the battery in the remote control key Fig 192 Remove c
212. h for windscreen The wash system operates immediately the windscreen wipers wipe somewhat later The wash system and the windscreen wiper operate simultaneously at a speed of more than 120 km h Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the wiper to continue for another 3 4 wiper strokes depending on the period of spraying of the windscreen At a speed of more than 2 km h the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen This func tion can be activated deactivated by a specialist garage Automatic wipe wash for the rear window Superb Combi The wash system operates immediately the windscreen wiper wipes somewhat later Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the wiper to continue for another 2 3 wiper strokes depending on the period of spraying of the windscreen The lever remains in position 6 Fig 46 Automatic rear window wiper Superb Combi If the windscreen wiper is in position 2 Fig 46 or 3 the rear window is wiped every 30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle s speed exceeds 5 km h If automatic windscreen wiping in rain is activated the lever is in the position 1 the function is only active if the windscreen wipers operate in continuous mode no break between each wiping process Automatic rear window wiping can be activated deactivated via the information display in the me
213. h sharp edges do not damage the follow ing a heating elements in the rear window a elements of the aerial integrated in the rear window a Aerial filaments integrated in the rear side windows Superb Combi Note Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load page 215 Seats and useful equipment 83 Class N1 vehicles First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 On class N1 vehicles which are not fitted with a protective grille a lashing set which complies with the standard EN 12195 1 4 must be used for fastening the load Fasteners First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 The boot provides the following fastening elements Fig 84 A Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets Fastening elements for fastening fixing nets CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes is 3 5 KN 350 kg 84 Using the system Fixing nets F Fig 85 Fastening examples for nets First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 Examples for attaching the fixing nets Fig 85 A Vertical pocket Horizontal pocket Floor net E WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury l CAUTION a The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1 5 kg Do not place any
214. h systems 189 Washing with a high pressure cleaner 190 The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is frequent washing How often the vehicle should be washed depends on factors such as gt Frequency of use gt Parking situation garage under trees etc gt Season gt Weather conditions gt Environmental influences The longer insect residues bird droppings tree sap road and industrial dust tar soot particles road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paintwork of your vehicle the more detrimental their destructive effect can be High temperatures such as those caused by intensive sun s rays accentuate this caustic effect It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of the winter F warnine a When washing your vehicle in the winter Water and ice in the braking sys tem can affect the braking efficiency risk of accident Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off risk of accident CAUTION Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight risk of paint damage SA For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose Washing by hand First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 189 Soak the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as well as possible Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge a washing glove or a washing
215. he boot lid from the outside safety fea ture e g when stopping at traffic lights etc gt The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever of the respective door gt In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle FJ warnine a Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the ve hicle in an emergency risk to life a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle ig Note If the safelock system is switched on page 32 the door opening lever and the central locking buttons do not operate Child safety lock Fig 17 Child safety locks on the rear doors First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 29 The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside The door can only be opened from the outside You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key Switching on gt Turn the slot of the safety lock in the direction of the arrow Fig 17 mirror inverted on the right doors Switching off gt Turn the slot of the safety lock in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig 17 mirror inverted on the right door Unlocking and opening 33 SS E A lt n JP 337 0555 Fig 18 Door handle door opening lever First
216. he front passenger airbag module in the dash panel In the event of a severe frontal collision the front airbag system offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel above the stowage compartment B Fig 154 When the airbags are deployed they inflate in front of the driver and front pas senger Fig 155 D The forward movement of the driver and of the front pas senger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced 178 Safety Driver s knee airbag Side airbags Fig 156 Driver s knee airbag below the steering column Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 177 The driver s knee airbag offers adequate protection for the driver s legs The driver s knee airbag A is located in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column Fig 156 In the event of a severe frontal collision the driver s knee airbag and front airbags are deployed The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus reduced EJ WARNING a Adjust the driver s seat in a forward back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10cm between the legs B and the dash panel
217. he introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 151 The time limit for the parking procedure with the help of the system is 6 minutes If the system has recognised a suitable parking space this parking space is shown in the display Fig 139 A gt Continue driving forwards until the display appears Fig 139 B gt Stop and make sure that the vehicle does not move forward until the start of the parking procedure gt Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R gt As soon as the following message is shown in the information cluster display Steering interv active Monitor area around veh let go of the steering wheel The steering will be taken over by the system gt Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully In the event that the parking procedure cannot be carried out in one go the park ing process is completed in further stages gt If the forwards arrow is flashing in the display Fig 139 c then select first gear or move the selector lever into position D gt Wait until the steering wheel automatically turns into the required position and then carefully drive forwards gt If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display Fig 139 D select reverse gear again or move the selector lever into position R gt Wait until the steering wheel automatically turns into the required position and then careful
218. he middle part of the cup hold er Fig 69 B and slide it into the armrest in the direction of the arrow FJ waRNING a Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder If the vehicle moves they may spill risk of scalding Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material e g glass porcelain This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident l CAUTION Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey There is a risk of spilling e g when braking which may cause damage to the elec trical components or seat upholstery a Slide in the cup holder before raising the rear armrest Seats and useful equipment 75 Cigarette lighter B3T 0692 Fig 70 Centre console Cigarette lighter front rear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 Usage gt Press the button of the cigarette lighter A or B Fig 70 gt Wait until the button pops forward gt Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use gt Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket E WARNING a Take care when using the cigarette lighter Improper usage can case burns a The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn Therefore never leave children unattended in the ve hicle m Note a The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12Volt socket for ele
219. he molten metal strip Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers which switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been eliminated Colour coding of fuses Colour Maximum amperage light brown dark brown red blue yellow white green orange EI warnine a Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 201 a Never repair fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher am perage risk of fire A different electrical system could be damaged CAUTION a f a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time have the electrical sys tem checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied correctly If the cover is not replaced properly water may get into the fuse box leading to a risk of vehicle damage hia Note a We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle A box of re placement fuses can be purchased from SKODA Original Accessories There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse There can be several consumer devices for one fuse depending on the vehicle s equipment a Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device a Multiple power consuming devices can share a single fuse
220. he rear seats back into their original positions page 72 Removing and refitting the net partition housing V lt 2 Xe Fig 105 Rear seats Removing the net partition housing B B3T 0663 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 92 Removing gt Fold the rear seats forward page 72 gt Open the rear right door gt Push the housing A in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the mounts on the right seat backrests in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 105 Install gt Insert the recesses on the housing A Fig 105into the mounts on the rear seat backrests gt Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 as far as the stop gt Fold the rear seats back into their original positions page 72 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Attachment points 94 Roofload _ 8 Seats and useful equipment 93 EI warnine The transported items on the roof rack must be securely attached risk of accident a Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps or tensioning straps a Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system a When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on the roof rack system the handling of the car may change as a result of the displacement of the centre of gravity The style of driving and speed
221. he temperature indicator and an audible signal will sound After pressing the rocker switch A Fig 10 on page 23 or the button C the function shown last is indicated Driving time The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased appears in the display page 24 Memory If you want to measure the time travelled from a particular moment in time on at this moment reset the memory by setting the button to zero page 24 Memory The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes and on vehicles which are fitted with an information display it is 99 hours and 59 mi nutes The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded Current fuel consumption The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres 100 km You can use this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consump tion The display appears in litres hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed Information system 23 Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in litres 100 km page 24 Memory To determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time set the memory at the start of the new measurement to zero using button B page 24 Memory After erasing the memory no value appears in the display until you have driven approx 300 m The display is updated regularly while you
222. he turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on The warning light for the turn signals and the warning light in the button also flash at the same time The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off If one of the airbags is deployed the hazard warning light system will switch on automatically When the turn signal is switched on while the hazard warning light system is on ignition on only the turn signal light for the selected driving direction will flash while the turn signal is switched on CAUTION Switch on the hazard warning light system if for example the following occurs a You encounter a traffic congestion a The vehicle has broken down Lights and visibility 53 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 Parking light P switching on gt Switch off the ignition gt Place the lever into the position A or where applicable B as far as it can go Fig 32 on page 50 the parking light on the right left side of the vehicle is switched on Switching on the side light on both sides gt Turn the light switch A to position Fig 31 on page 48 and lock the vehicle i Note If the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is switched off the parking light is not automatically switched on a This chapter contains informati
223. he tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit or con sult a specialist garage about repair options Breakdown kit Fig 186 Components of the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 226 The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compartment Components of the breakdown kit Valve remover Sticker with speed designation max 80 km h Inflation hose with plug Air compressor Tyre inflation hose Tyre inflation pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core alake BEES S The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core This is the only way in which you can remove and re install the valve core from the tyre valve The same also applies to the replacement valve core 1 Note a Observe the manufacturer s usage instructions for the breakdown kit a Anew bottle of sealant can be purchased from SKODA Original Parts Preparations for using the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 226 The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the breakdown kit gt Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible gt If you are in flowing traffic switch on the haza
224. hed off the steer ing can be locked 2 Heating glow plugs on ignition switched on 3 Starting engine To lock the steering with the ignition key withdrawn turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin engages audibly If the steering is locked and the key cannot or can only be turned with difficulty into the position 2 Fig 122 move the steering wheel back and forth and the steering lock will unlock Starting the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 129 Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system The glow plug warning light oo illuminates after the ignition has been switched on Start the engine after the warning light o gt has gone out You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating pe riod otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position P or N and firmly apply the handbrake gt Switch on the ignition 2 Fig 122 on page 130 gt Depress and hold the clutch pedal vehicles with a manual gearbox or brake pedal vehicles with an automatic gearbox until the engine starts gt Turn the key into position 3 to the stop and release immediately after the en gine has been started do not apply the accelerator After letting go the vehicle key will return to positio
225. hed off or if one of the doors is open the light will automatically go out after around 10 mi nutes First read and observe the introductory information given on page 54 a Two diffuse lights are integrated in the front interior lighting that illuminate Co the gearshift lever and the middle of the dash panel These are switched on auto matically when the parking light is activated Also after switching on the ignition Switching on when the parking lights are switched on the door handle lighting comes on E gt Press the cover glass on the symbol Fig 39 Switching off gt Press the cover glass on the symbol O Operating with the door contact switch gt Place the cover glass in the middle position In this position the same rules apply to this light as for the front interior EE light page 54 Interior light and rear reading lights AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 54 The rear interior light is operated together with the front interior light page 54 Lights and visibility 55 i Note If the door is open and the ignition switched off the light will extinguish auto matically after around 1 minutes a This chapter contains information on the following subjects Removable lamp 57 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 54 Remove the lamp 57 Changing rechargeable light batteries 57 The warning light is located in the low
226. hment points it is suited for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the Semi Universal approval IL SU The seat is suited for installation of an ISOFIX child seat with Semi Universal approval The Semi Universal category means that the child p ARE seat with the ISOFIX system is approved for your vehicle Observe the list a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat of vehicles that comes with the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the TOP TETHER system IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with a Only use child seats with the TOP TETHER system on the seats with the Universal approval and attachment with the TOP TETHER belt locking eyes X The seat is not fitted with fixing eyes for the ISOFIX system Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye Onno account should you equip your vehicle e g mount screws or other an chorage points Anchor eyelets for the TOP TETHER system Fig 163 Rear seat TOP TETHER Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 186 The anchor eyelets for attaching the belt for a child seat with the TOP TETHER system are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests Fig 163 188 Safety General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Washing byhand ___ 89 Automatic car was
227. ial gt Air conditioning filled with CFC free refrigerant gt No cadmium gt No asbestos gt Reduction in the vaporisation of plastics Manufacture gt Solvent free cavity protection gt Solvent free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant to the customer gt The use of solvent free adhesives gt No CFCs used in the production process gt Without use of mercury gt Use of water soluble paints Trade in and recycling of old cars SKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to pro tecting the environment and the preserving resources All new SKODA vehicles can be utilized up to 95 and always be returned In a lot of countries sufficient trade in networks have been created where you can trade in your vehicle After you trade in your vehicle you will receive a confir mation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations i Note You can find more detailed information about the trade in and recycling of old cars from a specialist garage D Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements 144 Driving This chapter contains information on the following subjects General information ees 4G Driving through water 1458 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 144 Pay attention to low slung parts of the vehicle such as the spoiler and exhaust particularly in the following si
228. ical burns CAUTION a There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected a The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehi cle a We recommend you buy jump start cables from a car battery specialist Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle Fig 187 Jump starting A flat battery B battery providing current First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 228 The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump start your vehicle if the en gine will not start because the battery is flat Jump start cables are required for this purpose The jump start cables must be attached in the following sequence gt Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery A Fig 187 gt Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying power B gt Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power B gt Attach the clamp 4 to a solid metal component firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself Starting engine gt Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle gt Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery gt If the engine does not start halt the attempt to start the engine after 10 sec onds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the
229. ical driving 140 Ballast 143 Driving at full throttle 142 Idling 142 Looking ahead 141 Regular maintenance 143 Saving energy 143 Short distances 142 Tyre inflation pressure 142 EDL 148 Electrical power windows 43 Button in the driver s door 41 42 Button in the rear doors 42 Electric sliding tilting roof 44 Electric tailgate Acoustic signals 40 Adjusting the top lid position 40 Deleting the top lid position 40 Force limit 38 Malfunctions 41 Manually actuate 38 Operating 39 Electronic Differential Lock EDL 148 Electronic immobiliser 130 Electronic Stability Control ESC 147 Emergency Activation of the sliding tilting roof 235 Automatic gearbox 234 Changing a wheel 222 Door locking 234 Hazard warning light system 53 jump starting 229 Locking the driver s door 233 Sliding tilting roof 235 Starting the engine KESSY 134 Switching off the ignition KESSY 134 Towing the using the towing device 231 Towing the vehicle 230 Tyre repair 226 Unlocking the boot lid 234 Unlocking the driver s door 233 Emergency equipment Car tool 222 Fire extinguisher 221 First aid kit 221 Jack 222 Warning triangle 221 Emissions 245 Engine Running in 140 Engine compartment 201 Brake fluid 209 Coolant 207 Overview 203 Vehicle battery 209 Engine oil 204 Capacity 205 Changing 206 checking 206 Replenishing 206 Specifications 205 Engine revoluti
230. icle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of 25 C Fuel additives Fuel additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar products must not be added to the diesel fuel CAUTION a Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the stand ard can cause severe damage to parts of the engine the fuel and exhaust sys tem a Damage caused by using diesel fuel which does not comply with the standards is excluded from the warranty a f a different fuel other than diesel fuel which complies to the above mentioned standards e g petrol is used by mistake do not start the engine or switch on the ignition Extensive damage to engine parts can occur We recommend that you have the fuel system cleaned by a specialist garage a Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults a Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel RME therefore this fuel must not be refuelled and driven The use of biofuel RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system Comply with the proscribed oil change intervals CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening and closing the bonnet gt 203 Engine compartment overview 203 Radiator fan 203 Windscreen washer system _ 2084 EJ warninec Injuries or scolding or risks of accident or fire may occur when working in the engine compartment For this reas
231. ifting the vehicle f the wheel has to be changed on a slope first of all block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent pos sible moving A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move the lifting jack causing the vehicle to fall down It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base Use a non slip base e g a rubber foot mat if the surface is smooth such as cobbled stones tiled floor etc a Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur pose Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed Never position any body parts such as arms or legs under the vehicle while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack a Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised risk of injury CAUTION a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm a f the wheel bolts are fastened too tightly this can cause damage to the anti theft wheel bolt and the adapter Note The anti theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a KODA Part ner a The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel Preliminary work First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 222 Always change a
232. ig 197 Selector lever emergency unlocking AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 233 gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Grasp the cover 1 in the area of arrow 2 Fig 197 and carefully pull upwards gt Also unlock the cover on the other side gt Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow 3 gt At the same time press the locking button in the selector lever and move the selector lever to position N If the selector lever is moved again to position P it is once again blocked This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 285 Activation after the waste and reconnecting the battery 2358 B3T 0597 Fig 198 Point for positioning screwdriver opening for positioning the key AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 235 The sliding tilting roof can be closed or opened manually if a fault occurs The emergency operation of the sliding tilting roof is located underneath the glasses storage box 1 page 78 Glasses storage box gt Open the glasses storage box gt Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the po sitions shown by the arrows 1 Fig 198 gt Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down and turning the screwdriver gt Insert an Allen key SW 4 up to the stop into the opening 2 and close or open the sliding
233. igh engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads before the en gine has reached its operating temperature risk of damaging the engine Do not tow start the engine risk of damaging the engine On vehicles with a catalytic converter unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite This in turn may damage the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 228 Jump starting a Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off SA For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as soon as the engine has started Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower C Note a After pressing the starter button while the steering is locked the steering is un locked the electrical components are activated e g radio navigation system etc and the igntion is switched on a f you do not leave the vehicle after locking the steering and wish to unlock the steering again press the starter button At the same time electrical components are activated e g radio navigation system etc and the ignition is s
234. ight adjuster on the front seats Fig 153 Front seat Seat belt height ad juster B3T 0390 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 171 The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size gt Press the height adjuster and move up or down in the desired direc tion Fig 153 gt Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has cor rectly locked in place CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Inertia reels 174 Belt tensioners 174 Inertia reels Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 174 Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel 174 Safety When pulling slowly on the seat belt the belt can move freely When pulling sharply on the seat belt the movement is locked by the inertia reel The belts also lock when full braking when the car accelerates when driving downhill and when cornering EI warnine If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it have it inspected im mediately by a specialist garage Belt tensioners AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 174 Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three point seat belt
235. ights up operate the brake pedal This is necessary to move the selector lever from position P and N page 138or to start the engine in vehicles with the KESSY system page 133 a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 Either the left or right gt indicator light flashes depending on the position of the turn signal lever 20 Using the system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light 20 comes on when the main beam or headlight flasher are se lected page 50 a Instruments and Indicator Lights 21 In vehicles with manual transmission the recommended gear is displayed at the same time instead of the gear selected A CAUTION The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different driving Situations such as overtaking This chapter contains information on the following subjects Recommended gear 22 Door boot lid and bonnet warning 22 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 E WARNING If at least one door the boot or the bonnet is open the information display indi Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re cates the relevant open door or boot bonnet with a vehicle symbol sponsible for road safety E An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km h E
236. ility is impaired e g due to medication alcohol or drugs gt Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit gt Always adjust the driving speed to the road traffic and weather conditions gt Take regular breaks on long journeys at least every two hours CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Correct seated position for the driver 169 Correct seated position for the front passenger 169 Correct seated position for the passengers in the rear seats 169 Examples of incorrect seated positions 169 EI WARNING Observe the following instructions for the correct seated position The front seats and head restraints must be adjusted to match the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers a If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position he is exposed to life threatening injuries in case he is hit by a deployed airbag a If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright the risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving as this will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury 168 Safety EI WARNING As the driver observe the following instructions a Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do no
237. ine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 lt Tailgate First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light lt comes on if the boot lid is opened FJ wARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Instruments and Indicator Lights 15 Power steering steering lock KESSY system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 Power steering If the indicator light lights up this indicates a partial failure of the power steer ing and the steering forces can be greater Seek help from a specialist garage If the indicator light lights up this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the steering assist has failed significantly higher steering forces Seek help from a specialist garage Steering lock KESSY system gt While the indicator light is flashing the steering lock cannot be released Fur ther information page 34 KESSY gt If the warning light flashes a signal tone sounds and the following message appears in the information display Steering column lock Workshop the elec trical steering lock is faulty Seek help from a specialist garage gt If the warning light flashes a beep sounds and the information display
238. ine link snow chains They must not project more than 9 mm includ ing the chain lock Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains CAUTION The chains must be removed when driving on roads which are free of snow They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle damage the tyres and are rapidly destroyed Do it yourself Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects First aid kit and warning triangle 22 Fire extinguisher 221 Car tool 222 First aid kit and warning triangle EAN is A T B3T 0668 Fig 179 Stowage compartment for the first aid kit Superb Superb Combi Fig 180 Placing of the warning triangle B3T 0427 Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 221 First aid box The compartment for stowing the first aid box is located in the right of the boot Fig 179 Warning triangle The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber straps Fig 180 EJ warnine The first aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants i Note Pay attention to the expiration date of the first aid kit We recommend using a first aid kit from SKODA Original Accessories which are available from a SKODA Partner Fire extinguisher Co First
239. ines without a DPF Specifications and capacity in l for vehicles with fixed service intervals Petrol engines Specification ca ey 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI VW 501 01 VW 502 00 3 6 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI MW 30600 i 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI VW 502 00 4 6 3 6 1 191 kW FSI VW 502 00 55 Diesel engines Specification Filling lev el 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF l CAUTION ings H on page 204 Specifications and capacity in l for vehicles with flexible service intervals Petrol engines Specification Filling level 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI VW 503 00 VW 504 00 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI VW 504 00 VW 504 00 3 6 1 191 kW FSI VW 504 00 a f the above engine oils are not available a different engine oil can be used in an emergency To prevent damage to the engine a maximum of 0 5 litres only of the following engine oils may be used until the next oil change a For petrol engine models ACEA A3 ACEA B4 or API SN API SM a For diesel engine models ACEA C3 or API CJ 4 Inspecting and replenishing 205 Checking the oil level Fig 168 Dipstick First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on
240. information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The display can vary depending on the equipment Before the next service interval is reached a key symbol gt lt and the kilometres and days remaining until the next service is due are shown for about 10 seconds after the ignition is switched on Fig 7 The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or where applicable days until the service due date is reached Oil change service An oil change service is due if the display shows the number 1 at the point marked by the arrow Fig 7 The following message appears in the information display Oil change in km or days As soon as the due date for the service is reached a flashing key symbol lt and in the display for around 20 seconds after the ignition has been switched on the following text appears Oil change now OILCHNG Inspection An inspection is due if the display shows the number 2 at the point marked by the arrow Fig 7 The following message appears in the information display Inspection in km or days As soon as the due date for the service is reached a flashing key symbol lt and in the display for around 20 seconds after the ignition has been switched on the following text appears Inspection now INSPEC_ Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval You can use the button 3 to display the remaining distance and days until
241. ing a short distance amp Electronic Stability Control ESC First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light flashes amp to show that the ESC is currently operating If the indicator light comes on immediately after you start the engine the ESC might be switched off due to technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again If the indicator light does not light up after you switch the engine back on the ESR is fully functional again If the warning light lights up amp there is a fault in the ESC system The following message appears in the information display 0 Error Electronic Stability Control ESC Seek help from a specialist garage Further information page 147 Electronic Stability Control ESC Note If the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected the indicator light 5 comes on after switching on the ignition The indicator light must go out after driving a short distance Antilock brake system ABS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 If the indicator light lights up there is a fault in the ABS The following message appears in the information display Error ABS The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS Seek help from a specialist garage EJ warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a
242. ing about 100 km The indicator light flashes engine oil level sensor faulty The following message appears in the information display Oil sensor Workshop If the engine oil level sensor is faulty the indicator light flashes several times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on Seek help from a specialist garage E WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 lt Traction Control System TCS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light flashes to show that the ASR is currently operating If the indicator light comes on immediately after starting the engine the ASR can be switched off for technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again If the indicator light does not light up after you switch the engine back on the ASR is fully functional again If the indicator light 5 lights up there is a fault in the ASR The following message appears in the information display Error Traction control TCS Seek help from a specialist garage Further information page 148 Traction Control System ASR Note If the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected the indicator light comes on after switching on the ignition The indicator light should go out after driv
243. ing and ma noeuvring page 150 Visual parking system The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the bumper and an obstacle The ultrasound sensors are located on the front rear bumper Explanation of graphic range of sensors in the vicinity of the vehicle Area Fig 136 Range of sensors a These are only the approximate ranges of sensors b Applies only for vehicles with 12 sensors The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is re duced A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx 30 cm danger area From this moment on do not continue driving 150 Driving The length of the vehicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing device The danger area thus begins at a distance of around 35 cm on vehicles equipped with a factory fitted towing device Activation deactivation The system is automatically activated by selecting reverse gear or pressing the Pa Fig 136 symbol button The symbol P lights up in the button activation is confirmed by a brief acoustic signal The system is deactivated by moving out of reverse gear or by pressing the Pu symbol button or is deactivated automatically at a speed of over 10 km h the Pu symbol in the button goes out On vehicles which only have rear sensors the system can only be deactivated by moving out of reverse gear Towing a trailer On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted tow
244. ing device only system areas A and B Fig 136 are active when towing a trailer Visual parking system A Look Safe to move Fig 137 Illustrated examples monochromatic display colour display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 149 For navigation systems and some factory installed radios the system is displayed on the screen Explanation of graphic A An obstacle detected in the collision area Do not drive the vehicle An obstacle so far detected outside the collision area An obstacle detected in the collision area Do not drive the vehicle An area without any obstacles or a free space between the bumper and an obstacle An obstacle so far detected outside the collision area An area behind the detected obstacle Switching off the visual parking system Switching the acoustic parking aid on off Z o I o CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Finding a parking space 152 Parking 152 Departing from a parallel parking space 153 Automatic brake assist 153 Information messages 154 The parking aid is part of the park assist system therefore the information and safety guidelines page 149 Parking aid must be read and observed Park Assist in the following referred to as the system helps drivers park in suita ble parallel and perpendicular parking places and also to manoeuvre out of paral
245. ing eyes in the boot that can for example be used to attach the fixing nets gt Press the button 1 Fig 102 and push the lashing eye in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 gt Fold up the clamp 3 Fig 102 and for example attach the fixing net 92 Using the system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Using the net partition behind the rear seats C CSCSCSCSCSCS lt S P Using the net partition behind the front seats 93 Removing and refitting the net partition housing 93 E WARNING a Ensure that the cross rod is inserted into the mounts C Fig 103 on page 92 or Fig 104 on page 93 in the front position a The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding back the seat cushions and backrests they must be ready to use a The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on sud den braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged Only then can the seat belt for the middle seat reliably fulfil its function Using the net partition behind the rear seats a Fig 103 Net partition behind the front seats in the pulled out state gt DLL No B3T 0330 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 92 Pulling out gt Pull the
246. ing seat belt This chapter contains information on the following subjects The physical principle of a frontal collision CSCSSSTT_C CdIZ2 Fastening and unfastening seat belts 173 Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats 174 Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an ac cident They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival in the event of a major accident Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated posi tion Fig 149 The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy energy of motion to a considerable ex tent They also prevent uncontrolled movements which in turn may well result in severe injuries Occupants of a vehicle who have correctly fastened their seat belts have the ma jor benefit of the fact that the kinetic energy is absorbed as effectively as possi ble by the belts The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety measures such as the airbag system also contribute to the kinetic energy being reduced as effectively as possible The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the ve hicle page 184 EJ warnine a Fasten your seat belt before each journey even when driving in town This also applies to the passengers seated at the rear risk of injury Expectant women must also alway
247. ing the tyre 227 Check after 10 minutes driving 228 Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to approx 4 mm A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a permanent repair on the tyre Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist garage The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately Foreign bodies e g screws or nails are not to be removed from the tyre The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances gt There is damage to the rim gt The outside temperature is less than 20 C gt The tears or punctures are greater than 4 mm in size gt There is damage to the tyre wall gt Driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre gt If the use by date see inflation bottle has passed E WARNING A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard tyre Do not travel faster than 80 km h a Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering Check the tyre pressure after driving for 10 minutes The sealant is hazardous to heath Remove immediately if it comes into con tact with the skin SA For the sake of the environment Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in ac cordance with environmental protection regulations 226 Do it yourself i Note Immediately replace t
248. ion This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 46 Opening closing the sun screen 46 Convenience operation of Sliding tilting roof 47 The panoramic sliding tilting roof abbreviated in the following as sliding tilting roof can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor temperature is higher than 20 C The sliding tilting roof can still be operated for approx 10 minutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as the driver or front passenger s door is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding tilting roof CAUTION a Always close the sliding tilting roof before disconnecting the battery a If for example the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possi ble that the sliding tilting roof does not operate correctly Next move the rotary switch into position A Fig 29 on page 46 pull the recess firmly downwards and forwards The sliding tilting roof opens and closes again after around 10 sec onds Do not release the control dial until it has done so a If for example the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possi ble that the sun screen does not operate correctly Then turn the switch to posi tion A Fig 29 on page 46and press and hold the button G Fig 30 on page 46 The sun screen opens and closes again after around 10 seconds Do not release the control dial until it has done so Unlocking and
249. ion in Itr 100 km intra urban extra urban combined CO emission levels combined in g km Type plate The nameplate Fig 214 B is located at the bottom of the B pillar on the driv er s side The type plate lists the following weights Maximum permissible gross weight 9 Maximum permissible towed weight towing vehicle and trailer Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number VIN vehicle body number is stamped into the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome This number is al so located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen together with a VIN bar code Engine number The engine number is stamped into the engine block Operating weight The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only This value repre sents the minimum operating weight without additional weight increasing equip ment such as air conditioning system spare wheel or trailer hitch The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver 75 kg the weight of the operating fluids the tool kit and a fuel tank filled to 90 capacity Technical data 245 It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the operating weight H The payload consists of the following components gt Passengers gt
250. ion of sliding tilting roof 45 Convenience operation of sliding tilting roof Su perb Combi 47 Coolant 207 Checking 208 Replenishing 208 Temperature display 9 Correct seated position 168 Driver 169 Front passenger 169 Instructions 169 Rear seats 169 Counter for distance driven 10 Cruise control system 155 Activating deactivating 155 Changing the stored speed 156 Storing and maintaining speed 155 Temporarily deactivating 156 Cup holders 5 D Dayl dri lights 49 De icing the windscreen and rear window 58 Deactivating an airbag 181 Decorative films 192 Delayed locking of the tailgate see Tailgate 38 Diesel refer to Fuel 200 Diesel fuel Operation in winter 200 Diesel particle filter 18 Digital clock 12 Dipstick 206 Display 10 Coolant temperature 9 Service interval 1 Distance driven 10 Door Child safety lock 33 Closing 34 Emergency locking the driver s door 233 Indicator light for an open door 14 Opening 34 Door locking Emergency 234 Doors Emergency locking 234 Driver Steering Recommendation DSR _ _ 148 Driving Abroad 145 Driving through water on roads 145 Emissions 245 Fuel consumption 245 Driving economically Economical gear changing 141 Driving through water 145 DSR 148 DVD preinstallation 126 E Econom
251. ions for your mobile phone The following steps must be carried out for the connection Connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP profile gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP function gt Switch on the ignition 1 Depending on the Bluetooth version on the mobile phone an automatically generated 6 digit PIN SSP will either be displayed or a 16 digit code displayed in the information display will need to be entered into your mobile phone and confirmed within 30 seconds by following the instructions on your mobile phone display gt Select the Phone New user menu in the information display and wait until the hands free system has completed the search gt Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found gt Confirm the PIN gt If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code enter the PIN code for the SIM card in your phone The telephone connects to the hands free system during the first connection you can only enter the PIN code in the information display when the vehicle is stationary as this is the only situation when you can choose whether the PIN code should be stored gt Follow the instructions in the information display the first time a new user is stored gt Reconfirm the rSAP command on your mobile phone to download the tele phone book and the identificatio
252. ior of your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA service partner Natural leather First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 194 Leather is a natural material with specific properties and requires regular clean ing and maintenance The leather should be cleaned on a regular basis depending on the amount of Wear and tear Dust and dirt in the pores and folds act as abrasive materials This leads to severe corrosion and the premature brittleness of the leather surface We recommend that you remove dust regularly and at short intervals using a cloth or vacuum cleaner Clean soiled leather surfaces with a water dampened cotton or woollen cloth and then dry with a clean dry cloth M Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution 2 table spoons of neutral soap to 1 litre of water To remove stains use a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose Treat the leather regularly and at suitable intervals using a suitable leather care product CAUTION a Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that no water gets into the seams Otherwise the leather could become brittle or cracked a Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the leather from bleaching If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it a Sharp edged objects on
253. irst read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 176 The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer additional protection in the event of an accident The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on In certain accident situations the several airbags may be deployed simultaneous ly The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions rear end collisions tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover Deployment factors It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation An important role is played by factors such as the type of object that the vehicle hits hard soft the impact angle vehicle speed etc A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which oc curs The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the rele vant restraint system If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision re mains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit the air bags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal collision gt Driver s front airbag gt Front passenger airbag gt Driver s knee airbag
254. it illuminates part B Fig 41 the lamp is in the holder gt portable lamp it illuminates part C the lamp has been removed from the holder If the lamp is in the holder it is automatically switched on when the tailgate is opened and switched off again when the tailgate is closed The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type AAA batteries The rechargeable batteries are constantly charged when the engine is running It takes approx 3 hours to fully charge the rechargeable batteries The lamp is fitted with magnets Therefore it is possible to attach the lamp for example on the vehicle body after removing it Remove the lamp First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 56 Taking out the lamp gt Grasp the lamp in the areas of the arrows D Fig 41 on page 57 and swivel it in the direction of the arrow E Reinserting the lamp the holder gt First of all place the deactivated lamp in the holder on the side facing the boot lid and then press on the lamp from the other side until it is clicks into place Operation of the lamp gt If you press the button A once the lamp lights up with 100 light intensity gt If you press the button A again the lamp lights up with 50 light intensity gt If you press the button A once again the lamp goes out Changing rechargeable light batteries First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ing
255. ition lock by pressing the button on the touchscreen of the radio or navigation sys tem refer to the operating instructions for the radio or navigation system Note In the memory of the hands free system up to three users can be stored whereby the hands free system can only communicate actively with one user If a connection is established with a fourth mobile phone one of the users must be deleted a When connecting to the hands free system follow the instructions on your mo bile phone Operate the telephone via the information display Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 112 If no phone is connected to the hands free system the message No paired phone found appears along with the following menu items when the Mobile phone menu is selected Help This menu item appears when no paired phone is stored in the memory of the hands free system Connect This menu item appears when one or more paired phones are stored in the memory of the hands free system New user New phone Media player Media player Active device Connected device Paired devices List of paired devices 1 Does not apply for Radio Swing 114 Using the system Search Device search a Visibility Visibility on off SOS Emergency If a telephone is paired with the hands free system the following menu items can be selected in the Mobile phone menu Phone book The Phone book menu item lists the co
256. itions Be careful not to injure fingers between the holder and the backrest when changes to the position of the DVD player holder are made a The DVD player holder must not be used when the rear seat backrest or the rear seat is folded forward or has been removed completely Note Follow the instructions given in the operating instructions of the DVD player hold er DVD player Communication and multimedia 127 I WARNING Continued Driving a f the steering wheel is adjusted further towards the head the protection provided by the driver airbag in the event of an accident is reduced Check that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest a When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed CQ Introduction EI warnine Pig 120 T whee 7 l Correct seated position for the a When driving the ignition key must always be in the position 2 Fig 122 driver on page 130 ignition switched on without the engine running This position is indicated by the indicator lights coming on If this is not the case this could result in unexpected locking of the steering wheel risk of accident Only pull the ignition key from the ignition
257. iving when accelerating or cornering and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic there is the risk of an accident a When driving ensure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver s footwell You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes or operate the clutch or accelerator pedal risk of accident Car park ticket holder Fig 64 Windscreen Parking ticket hold er B3T 0675 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 The note holder is designed e g for attaching car park tickets FI warninec The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to restrict the driver s vision Seats and useful equipment 73 Storage compartment on the driver s side Fig 65 Storage compartment on the driver s side B3T 0646 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 Opening gt Raise the handle A Fig 65 and open out the compartment in the direction of the arrow Closing gt Swivel the lid against the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place EI WARNING The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea sons 74 Using the system Storage compartments in the doors B3T 0690 Fig 66 Storage compartment in the front door in the rear door First read and observe the introductory information
258. key A key must be in the vehicle to unlock the steering switch on the steering and start the vehicle FJ wAaRNING a Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle This is particu larly important if children are left in the vehicle Children could otherwise start the engine for example risk of accident or injury a Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The ex haust gases from the engine contain substances such as odourless and col ourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas risk to life Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death a Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent After switching off the ignition the radiator fan may intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes Starting off and Driving 131 CAUTION a The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the vehi cle is at a standstill The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is activa ted when the engine is running a If the engine does not start after the second attempt the fuse for the electric fuel pump in petrol engines or for the control unit for the glow plug system or the relay for the glow plug system and fuel pump in diesel engines could be faul ty Check the fuse and replace if necessary page 237 or seek assistance from a specialist garage a Avoid h
259. key gt Pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1 mi nute Fig 193 Radio remote control Battery cover B5E 0220 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 232 The battery is located under a cover on the back of the radio remote con trol Fig 193 gt Insert a flat blunt object such as a coin into the gap of the battery cover gt Turn the cover against the direction of the arrow up to the mark to open the cover gt Replace the battery gt Return the battery cover gt Turn the cover in the direction of the arrow up to the initial marking engage This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unlocking locking the driver s door 233 Locking a door 234 Unlocking the boot lid 234 Selector lever emergency unlocking S 234m Fig 194 Handle on the driver s door cov ered locking cylinder Col First read and observe the introductory information given on page 233 gt Pull on the handle gt Push the vehicle key into the recess on the bottom side of the cover in the re gion of the arrow and fold it upwards Fig 194 gt Insert the vehicle key the buttons facing upward into the locking cylinder and lock unlock the vehicle CAUTION Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency locking unlocking T Emergency equipment and self help 233 Locking a door
260. l snow ice etc there may be deviations due to the conditions of the calculated road surface We therefore recommend not using the system in such situations CAUTION a f other vehicles are parked behind or on the kerb the system can guide your vehicle beyond the kerb or onto it Ensure that the wheels or the wheel rims of your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time a Under certain circumstances the surfaces or structures of certain objects such as wire mesh fences or powder snow cannot be detected by the system a The evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure depend on the circumference of the wheels The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fit ted with the wheel size approved by the manufacturer a If wheels other than those approved by the manufacturer are mounted the re sulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly This can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage a Under certain circumstances the system may not function correctly for exam ple if the vehicle is fitted with snow chains or a temporary spare wheel Assist systems 151 Finding a parking space ae 18 5 km o p 12440 1253 2 Fig 138 System button displays in the instrument cluster display First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 151 The search for a suitable parking space takes place while the display is switch
261. lded forward Superb Combi Fig 63 Folding the seat cushion for wards S A AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 69 gt Pull up the seat cushion in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 63 and fold for wards in the direction of the arrow 2 w Note To achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible the rear head re straints can be removed before folding the seat backrests forwards Store the re moved head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Car park ticket holder 73 Storage compartment on the driver s side 74 Storage compartments in the doors 74 Storage compartment in the front centre console 74 75 Cigarette lighter 76 Ashtray 76 12 volt power outlet 77 Storage compartment under the armrest 77 Storage net in the front centre console 78 Glasses storage box 78 Storage compartment on the passenger side 79 Storage compartment under the passenger seat 79 Clothes hook 80 Storage pockets on the front seats 80 Storage compartment for umbrella 80 Storage compartment in rear centre console 81 Storage compartment in rear armrest 81 Rear seat backrest with through loading channel 81 Removable through loading bag 82 EJ warnine Do not place anything on the dash panel These objects might slide or fall down when dr
262. le SKODA Service Partners First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 196 SKODA Service Partners feature modern specially developed tools and equip ment Here trained specialists have access to a comprehensive range of SKODA Original Parts and SKODA Original Accessories for carrying out modifications re pairs and technical alterations All SKODA service partners operate according to the most recent guidelines and instructions from KODA AUTO a s All service and repair work is therefore carried out on time and at the appropriate quality Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good techni cal condition SKODA Service Partners are therefore properly prepared to service your vehicle and to provide quality work We therefore advise you to have all modifications re pairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Spoiler First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 196 If your new vehicle is fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the spoiler on the luggage compartment lid the following instructions must be adhered to gt For safety reasons the vehicle must only be fitted with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the associated spoiler on the luggage compart ment lid gt This kind of spoiler cannot be
263. le and switch the wiper on again Note a Each time the ignition switches off for the third time the position of the wind screen wipers changes This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rubbers a The rear window wiper only operates if the boot lid is closed 60 Using the system a The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx 10 C a Keep the wiper blades clean They may become soiled e g with wax residues after washing in automatic car wash systems page 189 Windscreen wipers and washers Fig 46 Operating lever Operation of the windscreen wipers and washer First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 59 Function of the windscreen wipers and washers in the individual posi tions Fig 46 Wipers off Periodic windscreen wiping automatic wiping in rain slow windscreen wiping rapid windscreen wiping Flick windscreen wiping spring tensioned position Automatic wipe wash for windscreen spring tensioned position Wiping the rear window pane the windscreen wiper wipes every 6 seconds Automatic wipe wash for the rear window spring tensioned position Switches for setting the required break between the individual wiper strokes 1 periodic windscreen wiping or the wiper speed in rain 1 automatic windscreen wiping in rain FIN ele eI Selle Automatic wipe was
264. le loading floor by the handle and lift gently in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 97 gt Extend the variable load floor over the bumper in the direction of the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening C The variable loading floor which is pulled out in such a way is solely used as a seat for example for changing shoes gt To push in the rear section of the variable loading floor grasp by the handle and lift slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 gt Slide the variable load floor forward up to the stop When pulling out the variable loading floor the front edge close to the rear seats is lifted at the same time Thus small objects can no longer fall into the space between the boot floor and the variable loading floor CAUTION Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged 90 Using the system Dividing the boot Y Fig 98 Dividing the boot all B3T 0325 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 89 The boot can be divided with the variable loading floor gt Grasp the rear of the variable loading floor by the handle and lift in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 97 on page 90 gt Insert the trailing edge in one of the openings A Fig 98 The variable loading floor is secured in the openings A against movement The variable loading floor can be pulled out a little more before dividing the boot with the va
265. lean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors boot cover etc using specific cleaning agents e g dry foam Use a soft sponge brush or commercially available microfibre cloth Use a cloth and a specific cleaning agent to clean the roof trim Remove any lumps on the cover fabric and any fabric residue using a brush Remove stubborn hair using a cleaning glove Alcantara Dust and fine dirt particles in pores creases and seams may chafe and damage the surface If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the Al cantara seat covers from the direct rays of the sun to prevent fading Minor changes in colour caused by use are normal CAUTION Do not use any leather cleaners on Alcantara seat covers For Alcantara seat covers do not use any solvents floor wax shoe cream stain remover leather cleaners or similar agents a Avoid leaving the vehicle in bright sunlight for long periods of time in order to stop the fabric from bleaching If the vehicle is parked outside for long periods of time cover the fabric to protect it from direct sunlight a Some clothing materials e g dark denim do not have sufficient colour fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers even when used correctly This applies particularly to light coloured seat covers This does not relate to a fault in the seat cover but rather to poor colour fastness of the clothin
266. lease always present the service schedule when you take your vehicle to a specialist garage If the service schedule is missing or in poor condition please contact the special ist garage that regularly services your vehicle You will need to request a dupli cate in which the specialist garage will confirm the service work previously car ried out The Help on the road brochure The Help on the road brochure contains the most important emergency tele phone numbers as well as telephone numbers and contact addresses of SKODA Partners in the various different countries Abbreviations Using the system Cockpit Overview Instruments and Indicator Lights Instrument cluster Warning lights Information system Driver information system Driving data multifunction display MAXI DOT information display Unlocking and opening Unlocking and locking KESSY Anti theft alarm system Tailgate Electric tailgate Superb Combi Electric power windows Electric sliding tilting roof Panoramic sunroof Superb Combi Lights and visibility Lights Interior lights Boot light Combi Visibility Windscreen wipers and washers Rear mirror Seats and useful equipment Adjusting the seats Seat features w 0 o oN 1 22 22 22 26 29 29 34 35 36 38 41 44 45 48 48 54 56 58 59 62 65 65 69
267. left on the front bumper either on its own in combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or in combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid gt We recommend that you consult the SKODA Service Partner for any repairs to or replacement addition or removal of spoilers FJ warninec If work on your vehicle s spoilers is not carried out properly this can lead to operational faults risk of accident and serious injuries Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 197 Airbags First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 196 The system components of the airbag system can be situated in the front bump er doors front seats roof lining or body EI WARNING Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of sys tem components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage a Modifications repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults and can also seri ously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system risk of accident and fatal injury a The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed Airbag modules cannot be repaired EI warnine Observe the following instructions for handling the airbag system a t is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag sy
268. lights up Automatic headlight control in rain If the light switch is in position AUTO and if automatic wiping in rain or wiping posi tion 2 or 3 is switched on for longer than 15 seconds page 60 the parking lights and low beam will switch on automatically The light switches off when automatic wiping wiping position 2 or 3 is not switched on for longer than approx 4 seconds CAUTION Do not affix any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the wind screen so that its functionality is not impaired or disabled Adaptive headlights AFS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 The AFS system works in tandem with automatic driving lamp control AUTO please read the following page 50 The AFS system makes sure the street remains lit up depending on the traffic and weather situation The system automatically adjusts the cone of light in front of the vehicle to the driving speed or the use of the wiper The AFS system can work only if the following condition is met v The light switch is in the position AUTO The AHL system operates in the following modes Out of town mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam The mode is active if none of the following modes are active City mode The cone of light in front of the vehicle is adjusted to illuminate the surrounding pavements junctions pedestrian crossings etc The
269. llowing points V The lever 1 is right at the top Fig 145 V The release pin 2 is completely exposed both its red and green parts are visible v The key is removed v The cap 3 is on the lock of the operating lever V The tow bar does not come out of the mounting recess even after heavy shaking EE WARNING Do not use the towing device unless the tow bar has been properly locked 162 Driving Removing the tow bar Fig 146 Unlock the operating lever of the ball head removing the ball head First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 160 gt Remove the cap 1 Fig 146 from the lock on the tow bar in the direction of the arrow gt Unlock the lock on the operating lever by turning the key 2 180 to the left so that the red marking becomes visible gt Grasp the ball head from underneath gt Press the release pin 3 in the direction of the arrow to the stop and simulta neously push the lever 4 downwards in the direction of the arrow to the stop The ball head is released in this position and falls freely into the hand If it does not fall freely into the hand use your other hand to push it upwards At the same time the tow bar latches into the ready position and is therefore ready to be re inserted into the mounting recess M gt Place the cap 4 Fig 142 on page 160 onto the mounting recess F WARNING Never allow the tow bar to remain u
270. lluminated Switch on automatic air distribution control gt Repeatedly press the button until the warning light on the right hand side of the button lights up 102 Using the system Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily If the air quality sensor does not switch on automatic recirculated air mode when there is an unpleasant smell you can switch it on manually gt Press the symbol button lt a The indicator light lights up in the button on the left side Switching recirculated air mode off gt Press the button AUTO or press the symbol button lt again until the warning lights in the button go out EI WARNING Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up Note a If the windscreen mists up press the symbol button maxq Press the symbol button AUTO when the windscreen is demisted a The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside temperature is higher than approx 2 C Controlling blower Coy First read and observe the introductory information given on page 100 The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the interior temperature However the blower stages can be manually adapt
271. lly true of vehicles fitted with wide tyres or high speed tyres In order to achieve the best possible handling properties winter tyres must be fit ted on all 4 wheels the minimum tread depth must be 4 mm and tyres must be no older than 4 years Winter tyres of a lower speed category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the information display in the menu item Winter tyres page 27 220 General Maintenance SA For the sake of the environment Fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they provide better handling prop erties a shorter braking distance less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 C The fuel consumption is also lower Snow chains Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 220 When driving in wintry road conditions snow chains improve not only traction but also the braking performance Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels For technical reasons it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following wheel tyre combinations Depth D Wheel size Tyre size 205 55 7 x 162 45 mm 6J x 167 50 mm 205 55 6J x 17 205 50 a Not valid for vehicles with 3 6 1 191 kW FSI engine 45 mm Only use f
272. lock when the vehicle has come to a complete stop by applying the handbrake Otherwise the steering could be blocked risk of accident ig Note We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle This This chapter contains information on the following subjects Adjusting the steering wheel position 1e acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car Power steering 129 E warnine a Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the vehicle is stationary a Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A Fig 120 between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm Adjust the distance between your legs and the dash panel in the area of the knee airbag to at least 10 cm B If you do not comply with the minimum distance the airbag system may not be able to properly protect you risk to life a The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked whilst driving so that the steering wheel cannot accidentally change position during the jour ney risk of accident 128 Driving Adjusting the steering wheel position Fig 121 Adjustable steering wheel Lever below steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 128 The height and forward back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted gt First of all adjust the driver s seat page 65 gt Pull the lever below the steering wheel down
273. ly reverse These steps can be repeated several times one after the other As soon as the parking procedure is completed an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the instrument cluster display O Steering interv finished Please take over steering Explanation of graphic A Parking place recognised with the information to drive on Parking place recognised with the information to engage the reverse gear Indication for selecting the forward gear D Indication for selecting the reverse gear Automatic termination The system cancels the parking procedure if one of the following cases occurs gt Speed of 7 km h repeatedly exceeded during the parking procedure gt Time limit of 6 minutes exceeded for the parking procedure gt System button pressed gt TCS system switched off gt Intervention of the driver in the automatic steering procedure stops the steer ing wheel gt Reverse gear disengaged or selector lever moved out of position R when re versing into the parking space gt Selector lever moved into position P gt There is a system fault system temporarily not available gt Automatic braking for damage limitation If any of the above events occurs the following warning message is dis played page 154 Departing from a parallel parking space First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 151 Manoeuvring out gt Pr
274. ly switched off if you attempt to close the window again within the next 10 seconds the window will now close with full force If you wait longer than 10 seconds the force limiter is switched on again 1 Convenience opening and closing the windows with the button Alis possible immediately after un locking the vehicle or turning off the ignition and opening the driver s or front passenger s door Window convenience operation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 Convenience opening closing of all windows can be operated by locking unlock ing the vehicle as follows The prerequisite for ensuring that the convenience operating feature correctly is the automatic opening closing of all windows is operational Opening and closing can take place in one of the following ways Opening gt Press and hold the symbol button on the key gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the unlock position gt Press and hold the upper part of the central locking button in the driver s door page 33 gt Hold the button A in the opening position Fig 26 on page 42 Closing gt Press and hold the symbol button amp on the key gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the lock position gt Press and hold the lower part of the central locking button page 33 in the driver s door gt Hold the button AP in the closing position Fig 26 on page 42 gt In the KESSY system
275. m a Gas discharge bulbs and LED diodes are replaced by a specialist garage Headlights Fig 204 Bulb arrangement Headlight with halogen bulb with Xenon bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 241 Headlight with halogen bulb 1 Low beam 2 Main beam separate daytime running lights and parking light Fuses and light bulbs 241 Headlights with Xenon light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn 3 Xenon gas discharge bulbs ings E on page 241 4 Main beam gt Remove the rubber cover 2 Fig 204 on page 241 gt Turn the bulb holder B Fig 206 anti clockwise up to the stop and remove k gt Replace the bulb insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in a clock Replacing bulb for low beam wise direction to the stop gt Insert the rubber cover Fig 205 Halogen headlight Changing the bulb for the low beam Replacing bulb for low beam B3T 0557 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 241 gt Remove the rubber cover 1 Fig 204 on page 241 gt Turn the plug with bulb A Fig 205 counter clockwise and remove it Fig 207 Headlights with Xenon light Changing the bulb for the main beam gt Change the bulb gt Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in a clockwise direction until the stop gt Insert the rubber cover First read and observe the int
276. making sorting Replacement of spare wheel with tyre repair kit ee Reduction of energy consumption Use of energy saving electromechanical steering instead of hydraulic type Optimisation of efficiency of generators Optimisation of operating consumption and electrical aA current consumption Optimisation of aerodynamic and rolling resistance Additional aerodynamic spoilers Additional covers at rack CD covers Optimised cooling input grid additional seal Reduction by 15 mm with frame Ro Wi tyres wheels with low rolling resistance The green seal represents SKODA AUTO commitment to environmentally responsible behaviour SS realised in the GreenLine series It expresses responsible engagement towards the environment and sustainable development fio www skoda auto com You also can do something for the environment The fuel consumption of your SKODA and the related pollutant emissions are determined crucially on how you drive The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how you deal with your vehicle This Owner s Manual shows you how to use your SKODA vehi cle with utmost care for the environment while driving eco nomically at the same time Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner s Manual that are marked amp below Work with us for the sake of the environment Navod k obsluze Superb anglicky 05 2013 S74 5610 09 20 3T0 O12 003 NP
277. mation is also shown on their displays This function can be switched off see operating instructions for the radio or navigation system Control elements PASSENGER AIR BAG B3T 0587 Fig 110 Climatronic Control elements Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 100 Functions of the individual controls Fig 110 A Adjust the temperature for the left side page 101 Adjust the blower speed page 102 Depending on equipment gt amp Aux heating on off page 104 gt Switching the windscreen heater on off page 58 D Adjust the temperature for the right side page 101 E Interior temperature sensor max Switch the intensive windscreen heater on off Air flow to the windows Bi 2 Air flow to the upper body 4 Air flow in the footwell Recirculation mode with air quality sensor on off page 102 G Switching the rear window heater on off page 58 Control the seat heater on the front left seat page 69 AUTO Switching automatic mode on page 101 OFF Switching Climatronic system off A C Switch cooling system on off page 101 DUAL Switch the temperature setting in Dual mode on off page 101 te Control the seat heater on the front right seat page 69 Note Do not stick anything on or cover the interior temperature sensor E otherwise it could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic automatic mode AR First read and observe the introductory inf
278. mbus navigation system the buttons and do not work Communication and multimedia 111 Operate the telephone via the information display Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 109 The following menu items can be selected from the Phone menu Phone book Dial number Call list Voice mailbox Bluetooth Settings Back Phone book The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone memory and the mobile phone SIM card Dial number Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item The re quired digits must be selected one after the other using the adjustment wheel and then confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel You can select digits 0 9 symbols and the Cancel Call and Delete functions Call list The following menu items can be selected in the Call list menu item Missed calls List of missed calls a Dialled numbers List of dialled numbers Received calls list of received calls Voice mailbox In the Voice mailbox menu item you can set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item User Overview of the stored telephones New user Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range Visibility Switches on the visibility of the hands free system for other devices 1 On vehicles fitted with
279. ment lid as otherwise this could crack risk of injury CAUTION a f the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed the lid is immediately locked automatically when closed Do not press on the rear window when closing the tailgate it could crack 7 Note The function of the handle above the licence plate is deactivated when starting off or at a speed of 5 km hour or more for vehicles with central locking The func tion is restored after the vehicle stops and the door is opened a Repeated opening and closing of the boot lid can lead to a temporary failure of the function due to the overheating protection of the motors of the Twindoor system TwinDoor open close small lid B3T 0576 Fig 20 Handle of boot lid opened small boot lid First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 36 After unlocking the boot lid can be opened with the handle above the number plate Opening gt Press the handle 1 Fig 20 at the lower edge of the tailgate and lift the lid Closing gt Pull down and strike the lid with the handle 2 Fig 20 The small door can also be opened by the symbol lt is pressed on the remote control key page 30 TwinDoor open close large lid Fig 21 Handle of boot lid opened large boot lid First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 36 After unlocking the boot lid can be opened with the handle ab
280. mergency page 233 Activation after 90 hours gt Unlock the vehicle using the symbol button on the remote control key gt Unlocking the driver s door in an emergency page 233 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Activating deactivating 36 Interior monitor and towing protection 36 The anti theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to break into the vehicle The system triggers audible and visual warning signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle hereafter referred to only as alarm An alarm is triggered when the following monitored areas of the vehicle have a fault gt Bonnet gt Boot lid gt Doors gt Ignition lock gt Vehicle inclination page 36 gt Interior of car page 36 gt A drop in voltage of the on board power supply gt Socket of the factory fitted towing device page 160 Towing a trailer An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon nected while the anti theft alarm system is activated The alarm is switched off by unlocking the vehicle or switching on the ignition CAUTION Before leaving the vehicle it must be checked that all of the doors and windows including the sliding tilting roof are locked in order to ensure the full functionality of the anti theft alarm system i Note The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years Unlocking an
281. mobile phones or two way radio systems may interfere with the func tionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle The reasons for this are as follows gt no external aerial gt external aerial incorrectly installed gt transmission power greater than 10 watts 106 Using the system EI warnine f a mobile phone or a two way radio system is operated in a vehicle without an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incorrectly this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the vehicle Two way radio systems mobile phones or mounts must not be installed on airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags a Never leave a mobile phone on a seat on the dash panel or in any area from where it becomes a projectile during a sudden braking manoeuvre an acci dent or a collision risk of injury a During air transport of the vehicle the Bluetooth function must be switch ed off by a specialist company Universal telephone preinstallation hands free Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 106 The universal telephone preinstallation hands free system includes a conven ience mode for the mobile phone via voice control the multifunction steering wheel the adapter radio or the navigation system F WARNING a Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation o
282. modes can be selected with the selector lever Fig 127 P Parking mode The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode The parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary R Reverse gear Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idling speed Before moving into mode R from mode P or N depress the brake pedal and press the locking button at the same time Fig 128 N Neutral The power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode D Mode for forwards travel normal programme In mode D the forward gears are automatically changed according to the engine load accelerator pedal actuation and driving speed S Mode for forwards travel sports programme In mode S the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at higher en gine speeds than in mode D Before changing to mode S from mode D press the locking button Fig 128 Starting off and Driving 137 Releasing selector lever from mode P or N selector lever lock The selector lever is locked in modes P and N to prevent the forwards travel mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster page 20 The selector lever is released by depressing the brake pedal while the pressing lock button at the same time Fig 128 The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving via posi
283. munication and multimedia 121 Voicecommand Action S LONG DIALOGUE The help is not reduced suitable for beginners CANCEL The dialogue is ended If the system does not recognise the command it repeats the first part of the help thus enabling a new entry to be completed After the 2nd error the system repeats the second part of the aid After the 3rd Failure is the answer Operation aborted and ends the dialogue Storing voice recording for a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book Voice tag Record menu item Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the Further op tions menu 122 Using the system Communication and multimedia 123 To ensure that music can be played via Bluetooth you must first pair the device with the hands free system in the Phone Bluetooth Media player menu The music playback process is performed on the connected device The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played back This chapter contains information on the following subjects via the hands free system can be controlled with the remote control page 121 Voice commands GSM II Music playback via Bluetooth 2G Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering i Note wheel 124 AUX IN and MDI inputs 125 The device bein
284. must therefore be adapted to the current circumstances a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility weather road and traffic conditions The permissible roof load permissible axle loads and permissible total vehi cle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstances risk of accident CAUTION Only use roof rack systems approved by KODA AUTO a s a f other roof rack systems are used or if the roof bars are not fitted correctly any resulting damage to the vehicle is not covered by the warranty Therefore ob serve the supplied fitting instructions for the roof rack system are observed a On models fitted with a power sliding tilting roof or a panoramic sliding roof ensure that the opened sliding tilting roof or the panoramic sliding roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof a Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened a The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system and the load that is secured to it Compare the vehicle height with available clear ances such as underpasses and garage doors a Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated car wash a Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load SA For the sake of the environment The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption 94 Using the system Attachment points
285. n dow Opening gt Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has moved into the desired position The window can be completely opened automatically by briefly pressing the but ton as far as the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing gt Pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the win dow has moved into the desired position The window can also be fully closed automatically by pulling the button up to the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately Force limit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 41 The electrical power window system is fitted with a force limiter It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec onds the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window being moved down for the second time even though the obstacle was not yet been re moved the closing process is only stopped During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window The force limiter is still switched on The force limiter is on
286. n 2 If the engine does not start within 10 seconds turn the key to position 1 Repeat the start up process after approx half a minute gt Release the handbrake Vehicles with manual transmission The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed The following message is shown in the information cluster display Depress clutch to start CLUTCH Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and the following mes sage appears in the display Apply the brake to start BRAKE Switching off the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 129 Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key into position 1 Fig 122 on page 130 For vehicles with automatic transmission the ignition key can only be removed if the selector lever is in position P CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unlocking and locking the steering KESSY __ CSCSCSCSSSC rzZPP Switching on the ignition 133 Starting the engine 133 Switching off the igniton S38 Switching off the engine 133 Emergency engine start 134 Emergency ignition shut off system gt Y O4 The KESSY system makes it possible to switch the ignition on off and to start stop the engine without actively using the
287. n 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Fuel additives Only use unleaded petrol which complies with the standard EN 228 in Germany standard DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 98 RON as these meet all of the requirements for fault free engine operation We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used CAUTION a All SKODA vehicles with petrol engines must only be operated with unleaded petrol Just filling the tank with leaded petrol once will damage the exhaust sys tem a If in an emergency the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane number than the one prescribed the journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a low engine load Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed oc tane number as soon as possible a Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed is used a Inno case may fuel additives with metal components be used especially not with manganese and iron content Do not use any LRP lead replacement petrol fuels with metal constituents risk of serious damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system a Do not use any fuels with metal constituents risk of serious damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust
288. n be stored again by pushing the rocker button B into the SET position Increasing the speed with the accelerator gt Depress the accelerator pedal Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed Decreasing the speed with the brake pedal The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal which temporarily deactivates the system page 156 Temporarily deactivating First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 155 The cruise control system can be temporarily deactivated by pushing the switch A Fig 140 on page 155into the spring mounted CANCEL position or by depress ing the brake or clutch pedal The set speed remains stored in the memory 156 Driving Briefly push the rocker button B into the RES position in order to resume the stored speed after the clutch or brake pedal is released QJ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Starting shutting down the engine 157 System operating conditions 5S Manually activating deactivating the system 158 Information messages 158 The START STOP system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing harmful exhaust emissions and CO gt emissions The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on In the start stop mode the engine automatically switches to the vehicle s idle phase e g when stopped at
289. n data from the SIM card into the hands free system Connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the HPP profile gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the Phone New user menu in the information display and wait until the hands free system has completed the search gt Select the phone you wish to connect from the list of units found gt Confirm the PIN gt Follow the instructions on the information display and the mobile phone to store a new user or to download the telephone book and identification data from the SIM card into the hands free system The telephone primarily connects via the rSAP profile If the PIN code was stored the telephone is automatically detected and connec ted with the hands free system the next time the ignition is switched on Check your mobile phone to see whether this automatic connection has been establish ed Communication and multimedia 113 Disconnecting the connection gt By removing the key from the ignition lock the connection is disconnected dur ing a telephone call gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt By disconnecting the user in the menu item Bluetooth User Select user Dis connect On vehicles which are fitted with a radio or navigation system at the factory it is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ign
290. n recuperate from the stress of the journey Please consult your doctor who can evaluate your specific condition CAUTION a Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them Do not use the seat heaters if the seats are not occupied by persons or if ob jects such as a child seat bag etc are fastened or stored on them A fault of the heating elements in the seat heating can occur a Do not clean the seats using moisture page 195 Seat covers Note a f the on board voltage drops the seat heating is switched off automatically in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control page 213 a f the heaters for the rear seats are set to the highest intensity level 3 they are automatically switched over to level 2 after 10 minutes two indicator lights are illuminated on the switch Ventilated front seats Fig 58 Rocker switch for the seat venti lation 70 Using the system mal First read and observe the introductory information given on page 69 Heat and condensation can be removed from the seat cushions and seat backr ests on the front seats The ventilation is operated using the rocker switch Fig 58 in the front part of the seat cushion in front of the seat control elements for the electric front seat adjustment Switching on gt Switch the rocker switch to position 1 lower intensity and to position 2 higher intensity Switching off gt Swi
291. n the direction of arrow 1 Fig 212 c gt Pull off the cable bundle with the plug cap Fig 212 D gt Press together the interlocks on the connector in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 212 244 Do it yourself gt Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction of the arrow 3 Install gt Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely gt Install the rubber seal in the body in the opposite direction to arrow 1 in Stall Fig 212 c gt Insert the tail lamp with the holes 1 Fig 213 on page 244 into the bolts on the body Fig 212 gt Carefully press the tail light into the bolts on the bodywork Be careful not to pinch the cable bundle between the bodywork and light gt Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover gt Ensure that the cover engages firmly Replacing bulbs in rear light Superb Combi Fig 213 Replacing the light bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 241 gt Turn the bulb holder 2 Fig 213 anti clockwise remove it from the lamp hous ing gt Push the faulty bulb into the holder turn in anti clockwise direction up to the stop and remove gt Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop gt Replace the hol
292. n the symbol button A C lights after activation even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system are met page 97 By light ing up of the indicator light in the button the operational readiness of the cooling system is signalled 98 Using the system Setting Co First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 97 Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes Setting of the control dial Fig 109 on page 97 Button Fig 109 on page 97 Settings Defrost defog windscreen and Desired tempera side windows ture To the right up to The fastest heating the stop Air outlet vents 2 Fig 107 A C BEN on page 96 Automatically switched on Open and align with the side Do not switch on l window Switched off Briefly switch on Opening Desired tempera t re 2or3 Comfortable heating Switched off Do not switch on Opening To the left up to briefly 4 then The fastest cooling the stop gt or3 Activated Briefly switch on Opening Desired tempera ture To the left up to the stop Comfortable cooling 1 2 or 3 Fresh air mode ventilation Desired position Activated Do not switch on Open and align to the roof Switched off Do not switch on Opening a We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels This c
293. nally on vehicles which are fitted with the anti theft alarm system an au dible signal sounds The system has not found a key If the system has not found a key in the vehicle the following message appears in the display of the instrument cluster Key not found NOKEY This can occur if the key is outside the vehicle the battery in the key is dis charged the key is defective or the electromagnetic field is strongly disturbed gt Fault in KESSY system If there is a fault in the KESSY system the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster Keyless access system faulty CHECK KEYLESS Seek help from a specialist garage Low voltage of the key battery If the voltage of the battery in the remote control key is too low the following message appears in the display of the instrument cluster Change the key battery KEY BATTERY Change the key battery page 232 Parking vehicle AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34 If the vehicle is not unlocked within 60 hours 90 hours the sensors in the handle of the driver front passenger s door are deactivated automatically Fig 15 on page 31 Activation after 60 hours gt Unlock the driver s door using the sensor 2 Fig 15 on page 31 gt Press the handle of the boot lid gt Unlock the vehicle using the symbol button on the remote control key gt Unlocking the driver s door in an e
294. nd on the electrical system It is essential to comply with the general applicable safety rules as well as the warning instructions outlined below a Keep children away from the vehicle battery a Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the bat tery vent openings Protect your eyes by wearing safety goggles or a face Shield risk of blindness a Always wear protective gloves eye and skin protection when handling the vehicle battery a The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must therefore be handled with the greatest of care a Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs a Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and if it comes into contact with the skin causes deep wounds that take a long time to heal Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases inflammations ulcers slin cracks a If any battery acid comes into contact with your eyes rinse the affected eye immediately with clean water for several minutes and consult a doctor imme diately a Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water If you swallow battery acid consult a doctor immediately EI warnine a t is prohibited to work with naked flames or lights a t is prohibited to smoke or carry out any activities that produce sparks 210 General Maintenance
295. nd switch the engine off there is a risk of engine damage Open door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light amp comes on if one or several doors are opened EI warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 7 Engine oil pressure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 When the indicator light is flashing the engine oil pressure is too low The following message appears in the information display Oil pressure Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 206 Even if the oil level is correct do not drive any further if the indicator light is flashing Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed Seek help from a specialist garage EJ warninec If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 Coolant temperature coolant level First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 If the indicator light lights up or flashes either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low The
296. nected to the hands free system SIM mode 2 SIM 2 is connected to the hands free system 115 Communication and multimedia Phone mode Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode Premium rSAP mode Handsfree HFP mode Off time Set the off time in increments of 5 min Access point Set the Internet access point APN Change the access point name User name User Name Password Password Switch off ph Switch off the hands free system the mobile phone remains paired Back Return in the main menu of the information display Internet connection via Bluetooth Coy First read and observe the introductory information given on page 112 A notebook can for example be connected to the Internet via the hands free system The control unit of the hands free system supports the GPRS EDGE and UMTS 3G technologies An Internet can only be established via a telephone which is connected via the rSAP profile The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary depending on the type and version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be connected Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate knowledge of the operating system for connecting the device Process of connection gt Connect the mobile phone with the hands free system gt Set the access point in the Mobile phone Settings Access point menu de pending on the operator usually Internet gt Switch on the visi
297. ng As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Use the additional interior mirror only to such an extent that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time Lights and visibility 63 External mirrors Fig 50 Rotary knob B3T 0696 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 62 Mirror heater gt Set the rotary knob to position GA Fig 50 The mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an outside temperature of 35 C Adjusting both mirrors in sync gt Set the rotary dial to position L or on right hand drive vehicles into position R Fig 50 The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob The synchronous adjustment of the two mirrors can be activated deactivated via the information display in the menu item Mirror adjust page 27 Adjusting the front passenger s mirror gt Set the rotary dial to position R or on right hand drive vehicles into position L Fig 50 The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob Switching off operating control gt Set the rotary knob to position 0 Fig 50 Folding in both of the exterior mirrors with the rotary knob gt Set the rotary knob to position amp Fig 50 It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched on and at a speed of up to 15 km h The mirro
298. ng closing the window from the driver seat 42 Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors 42 Force limit 43 Window convenience operation 4B Operational faults 43 The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on After switching the ignition off it is still possible to open or close the windows for approx 10 minutes The power windows are only switched off completely once the driver or front passenger door are opened When driving always use the existing heating air conditioning and ventilation system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle If the windows are opened dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds EJ waRNiNG a Ensure that no persons are still left in the vehicle when locking the vehicle In an emergency the windows will no longer be able to be opened from the inside a The system is fitted with a force limiter page 43 If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centi metres However the windows should be closed carefully risk of injury a t is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors safety pushbutton S Fig 26 on page 42 when children are being transported on the rear seats CAUTION Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric win dows a In
299. ng the battery from another vehicle 229 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system 229 Jump starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot 229 E WARNING a A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C If the battery is frozen do not jump start with the battery of another ve hicle there is a risk of explosion a Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the engine compartment page 201 a The non insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each other there is a risk of short circuit The jump start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle there is a risk of short circuit Do not clamp the jump start cable to the negative terminal of the dis charged battery There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started Route the jump start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating parts in the engine compartment Do not bend over the battery there is a risk of caustic burns The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly Keep any sources of ignition naked flame lit cigarettes etc away from the battery there is a risk of explosion a Never jump start vehicle batteries with insufficient acid levels risk of ex plosion and chem
300. ng the front wheels with the rear wheels as shown in the diagram Fig 174 You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres We recommend that you swap the tyres every 10 000 km in order to achieve even Wear on all tyres and to ensure optimal service life for the tyres Storing tyres Identify disassembled tyres so that the previous direction of rotation can be maintained if the tyres are reassembled Always store wheels or tyres in a cool dry place that is as dark as possible Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright Wear indicators The base of the tread of the tyres has 1 6 mm high wear indicators installed These wear indicators are located multiple times depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre Fig 173 A Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters TWI triangular symbols or other sym bols identify the position of the wear indicators 216 General Maintenance Tyre age Tyres age and lose their original characteristics even if they are not being used Therefore we recommend not using summer or winter tyres older than 6 or 4 years old respectively New tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 Only use radial tyres of the same type size rolling circumference and tread pat tern on one axle on all four wheels The tyre wheel combinations which ar
301. nit Only then can the remote control key be used again FI WARNING Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle even if it is only for a short time This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle Otherwise the children might start the engine or operate electrical equipment e g power windows risk of injury Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle has come to a stop The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally risk of accident 30 Using the system CAUTION a Each key contains electronic components therefore it must be protected against moisture and severe shocks a Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean Impurities textile fibres dust etc have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and igni tion lock a The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than approx 3 metres away page 232 Note If you lose a key please contact a specialist garage who will be able to provide you with a new one Locking unlocking with remote control Fig 14 Remote control key First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 29 Explanation of graphic a Unlocking the vehicle B Locking the vehicle lt s Unlocking the boot lid A Folding out folding up of the key bit Warning light Unlocking
302. nsecured in the boot This could cause boot damage on sudden braking and could put the safety of the occupants at risk CAUTION a f the lever is held firm and not pushed downwards as far as it can go it will go back up after the ball head is removed and will not latch into the ready position The tow bar will then need to be brought into this position before the next time it is fitted a Stow the ball head in the ready position with the key inserted in the box When doing so make the side opposite to the inserted key face downwards there is a risk of damaging the key a Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever e g do not step on it i Note a We recommend putting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the tow bar a Clean any dirt from the tow bar before stowing it away in the box with the vehi cle tool kit Use and care First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 160 Close the mounting recess with the cover to prevent any dirt from getting in Always check the tow bar before hitching a trailer Apply suitable grease where necessary Use the protective cover when stowing away the tow bar in order to stop the boot from getting dirty In the event of dirt clean the surfaces of the mounting recess and treat with a suitable preservative CAUTION Apply grease to the upper part of the mounting recess Make sure you do not re move any g
303. nt any damage to the opening mechanism Opening closing the sun screen Fig 30 Buttons for sun screen B3T 0583 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings M on page 45 The sun screen can be closed or opened using the buttons Fig 30 Opening gt Briefly press the button F Fig 30 to open fully gt Press and hold the button F to open to the desired position The opening process stops when one releases the button Closing gt Briefly press the button G Fig 30 to close fully gt Press and hold the button G to close in the desired position The closing process stops when one releases the button Convenience operation of Sliding tilting roof First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 45 The sliding tilting roof can be operated by locking unlocking using the key or us ing the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 31 Closing gt Hold down the symbol button amp on the key or when using the KESSY system keep your finger on the sensor 1 Fig 15 on page 31 H By releasing the lock or lifting your finger off the sensor 1 when using the KESSY system the closing process is immediately interrupted Tilting roof gt Press and hold the symbol button amp on the key EJ warnine Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not work when convenience clo
304. ntacts downloaded from the telephone memory and the mobile phone SIM card The following functions are available for each phone contact Display telephone number Voice tag Voice tag for the contact Replay Play a voice tag Record Record a voice contact Dial number Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item The re quired digits must be selected one after the other using the adjustment wheel and then confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel You can select digits 0 9 symbols and the Delete Call and Back functions Call list The following menu items can be selected in the Call list menu item Missed calls List of missed calls Received calls List of received calls Dialled numbers List of dialled numbers Delete lists Delete call registers Voice mailbox In the Voice mailbox menu item you can set or save the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number The required digits must be selected one after the other using the adjustment wheel and then confirmed by pressing the ad justment wheel You can select digits 0 9 symbols gt and the Delete Call Save and Back functions SMS A list of received text messages is displayed in the SMS menu item After calling a message the following functions appear Show Display text message Read The system reads out the selected text message through the vehicle s Speakers Send time Display message
305. ntil you have driven approx 300 m 1 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litre 24 Using the system The display is updated regularly while you are driving Current speed The current speed which is identical to the display of the speedometer 2 Fig 2 on page 8 is indicated on the display Oil temperature If the oil temperature is lower than 50 C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present only is displayed instead of the oil tempera ture Warning against excessive speeds The warning that the speed limit is being exceeded can be enabled disa bled page 25 Warning against excessive speeds in the display Memory Fig 11 Multifunction display Preset oy 40 Zan 6 fo EU ALE ay Ty Cg 4 al B3T 0665 AA First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 The multifunction display is equipped with two automatic memories The selected memory is shown in the Display Fig 11 Select memory gt Select one of the elements of the multi function display page 23 Select Infor mation gt Press the button B Fig 10 on page 23 or the adjustment wheellD briefly Reseting gt Select one of the elements of the multi function display page 23 Select Infor mation gt Select the desired memory gt Press and hold the button B Fig 10 on page 23 or adjustment wheel D
306. ntrol 105 Setting 104 Switching on off 104 Avoiding damage to the vehicle Driving through water 145 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 144 B Battery Replace the remote control of the heater heat er 233 Replacing the remote control key 232 Belts 171 Belt tensioners 174 Bonnet Closing 203 Opening 203 Warning light 15 Boot 82 Automatic retraction Superb Combi 87 Class N1 vehicles 84 Cover 86 Extending variable loading floor 89 Fasteners 84 Fixing floor covering 85 Fixing nets 84 Folding hook 85 Lighting 82 Luggage net 85 Non closable side pocket Superb Combi 88 Removable lamp Combi 57 Roll up boot cover Superb Combi 86 see Tailgate 37 Index 253 Side compartments with battery 88 Side pockets 87 Boot cover 86 Boot cover Superb Combi 86 Brake booster 125 Brake fluid 208 Changing 209 Checking 209 Brake pads Warning light 20 Brakes Brake assist systems 147 Brake booster 135 Brake fluid 209 Handbrake 135 Running in 140 Warning lights 14 Braking 134 Information for braking 134 Breakdown kit 226 Break recommendation See Fatigue detection 158 Bulbs Change 241 Button in the driver s door Electric power windows 41 C Car Computer see Multi function display 22 Car key Lock 30 Unlock 30 Car park ticket holder 73 Carrier 93 Car tool 222 Cavity protection 193 CD changer 126 Central locking button 33 254 Index Ch
307. ntrol ESC Pe Park Assist vVvvVvVVvV Vv Vv Pm Parking aid gt lt Tailgate operation Superb Combi Depending on equipment fitted gt Gearshift lever manual gearbox gt Selector lever automatic gearbox Depending on equipment fitted gt Ashtrays gt Storage compartment Depending on equipment fitted gt Operating controls for the air conditioning system gt Operating controls for Climatronic i Note The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items on right hand drive models may differ from that shown in Fig 1 The symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left hand drive models Cockpit 48 203 49 49 74 129 179 130 136 135 156 148 147 151 149 39 136 136 76 182 97 100 7 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Overview Engine revolutions counter Speedometer Coolant temperature display Display Fuel gauge Counter for distance driven Service Interval Display Digital clock Display in rear centre console Auto Check Control Fault display If there is a fault in the instrument cluster the Error message will appear in the display Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a specialist garage E WARNING a Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for road safety
308. nu item Rear wiper page 27 Winter setting of the windscreen wiper If the windscreen wipers are in rest position they cannot be folded out from the windscreen For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily gt Switch on the windscreen wipers gt Switch off the ignition The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when switching off the ignition The service position can also be used as a winter position page 236 Note If the slow or the fast wiper setting is switched on and the vehicle speed decrea ses to below 4 km h the wiper speed is incrementally set to a lower wiper speed The original setting is restored step by step when the speed of the vehicle ex ceeds 8 km h Alternative parking position of the rear windscreen wiper Superb Combi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 59 Each time after switching off the engine for the second time the wiper blade of the rear window wiper is tilted This prolongs the life of the wiper blade Activation deactivation gt Switch on the ignition gt Push the operating lever to position 6 Fig 46 on page 60 five times in suc cession within 5 seconds gt Switch off the ignition After switching on the ignition again the alternative park position of the rear window wiper is activated deactivated Headlight cleanin
309. ock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat until audibly it clicks into place Fig 151 A gt Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the maxi mum protection The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis must not be positioned across the stomach and must always fit snugly Fig 152 2 Expectant women must also always wear a Seat belt This is the only way of en suring optimal protection for the unborn child On expectant mothers the lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as pos sible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen Fig 152 D Release Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary gt Press the red button in the belt buckle Fig 151 B the lock tongue pops out gt Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing the seat belt does not twist CAUTION When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not damage the door trim or other parts of the interior Seat belts 173 Seat belt he
310. oductory information given on page 100 gt Press the button A C The indicator light in the button lights up gt Once again press the button A C The indicator light in the button goes out After the cooling system is switched off only the ventilation and heating function remains active whereby the minimum temperature that can be reached is the outside temperature Setting the temperature AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 100 The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately or to gether For both sides gt Turn the control dial A Fig 110 on page 100 to the left or right to increase or decrease the temperature The indicator light in the button DUAL lights up For the right side gt Turn the control dial D Fig 110 on page 100 to the left or right to increase or decrease the temperature The indicator light in the button DUAL lights up If the warning light in the symbol button DUAL is lit the temperature for both sides cannot be set with the control dial A This function can be resumed by pressing the symbol button DUAL The indicator light in the button goes out The air conditioning system 101 The interior temperature can be set between 18 C and 26 C The interior tem perature is regulated automatically within this range If a temperature lower than 18 C is selected a blue symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale
311. of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consumption of about 1 litre 100 kilometres At a speed of 100 120 km h your vehicle that is fitted with a roof rack cross member without a load will use use about 10 more fuel than normal due to the increased aerodynamic drag Regular maintenance First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a specialist garage you create the conditions needed for economical driving The maintenance state of your vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 higher than normal Check the oil level at regular intervals e g when filling up Oil consumption is de pendent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine Oil con sumption could be as high as 0 5 litres 1 000 km depending on your style of driv ing It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first and rea ches its lowest level only after a certain running in time The oil consumption of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving about 5 000 km SA For the sake of the environment a Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthetic high lubricity oils
312. of the instrument cluster after switching out the ignition Note SAFE locking Owner s manual CHECK SAFELOCK If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off the door can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever Switching off The safelock can be switched off by locking twice within 2 seconds 32 Using the system Switching on The safelock switches on automatically the next time the vehicle is locked and unlocked Switch on display The indicator light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals Switch off display The indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast goes out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds Individual settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 29 The following central locking functions can be set via the central information dis play page 27 Settings Opening a single door This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver s door The other doors the fuel filler flap and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked after be ing opened again Unlocking doors on one side of a vehicle This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver s side The other doors the fuel filler flap and the boot lid remain locked and are only unlocked af ter being opened again
313. of your vehicle gt Distribute loads as evenly as possible gt Place heavy objects as far forward as possible gt Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the nets page 84 In the event of an accident there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the ve hicle is travelling and the weight of the object Example In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h an unsecured object with a weight of 4 5 kg produces an energy which corresponds to 20 times its own weight This means that it results in a weight of approx 90 kg You can imagine the injuries that can occur if this object flies through the interior com partment and hits an occupant Luggage compartment light The light switches on off when the luggage compartment lid is opened or closed If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off the light will extinguish auto matically after around 10 minutes Boot light for Superb Combi vehicles page 56 E WARNING Store the objects in the boot and attach them to the lashing eyes Loose objects can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road users Loose objects could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants danger of death I WARNING Continued a Please
314. oisonous gas risk to life Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death a Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent After switching off the ignition the radiator fan may intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes CAUTION a The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the vehi cle is at a standstill The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is activa ted when the engine is running a If the engine does not start after the second attempt the fuse for the electric fuel pump in petrol engines or for the control unit for the glow plug system or the relay for the glow plug system and fuel pump in diesel engines could be faul ty Check the fuse and replace if necessary page 237 or seek assistance from a specialist garage Starting off and Driving 129 a Avoid high engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads before the en gine has reached its operating temperature risk of damaging the engine Do not tow start the engine risk of damaging the engine On vehicles with a catalytic converter unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite This in turn may damage the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 228 Jump starting Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of
315. ol unit Main relay Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit Windscreen wipers Not assigned Radiator fan valves Clutch brake pad sensor Lambda probe AKF valve Lambda probe Ignition Not assigned Front left main headlight left tail light Pump for ABS Power supply for terminal 15 ignition on Not assigned Power supply relay terminal X Power to the internal fuse carrier Not assigned a In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine the electrical components of this terminal are automatically switched off Power consumer Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG Not assigned Power supply relay terminal X Radio Not assigned Engine control unit Main relay Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit Data bus control unit Engine control unit Ignition Lambda probe petrol engine glow plug system relay and fuel pump diesel engine Front right main headlight right tail light Horn Audio amplifier sound system Windscreen wipers Valve for metering fuel coolant pump high pressure pump Lambda probe Clutch pedal switch Coil of the coolant pump relay valves high pressure pump Radiator fan Pump for ABS Front left main headlight left tail light Control unit for glow plug system Windscreen
316. om driving The system recommends a break at speeds of 65 200 km h After the ignition has been switched on the system evaluates the steering be haviour for 15 minutes This baseline analysis is constantly compared with the current steering behaviour If the system detects deviations from normal steering behaviour due to possible fatigue of the driver it recommends to take a break from driving The system deletes the stored baseline analysis if one of the following condi tions is met gt The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off gt The vehicle is stopped the seat belt removed and the driver s door opened gt The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed the sys tem recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes Activation deactivation The system can be activated deactivated via the information display in the Assis tants menu item page 26 Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 The amp symbol will appear in the instrument cluster display for a few seconds along with the following message Driver alert Take a break An audible signal is also emitted Assist systems 159 Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Description 160 Adjusting the ready position 161 Fitting the tow bar 161
317. on confirm the creation of a new user profile in the information display If there is no free space available to create a new user profile delete an existing user profile During the connecting procedure no other mobile phone may be connected with the hands free system Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands free system whereby on ly one mobile phone can communicate with the hands free system The visibility of the hands free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes af ter the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile phone has connected to the hands free system Restoring the visibility of the hands free system If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands free sys tem within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition the visibility of the hands free system can be reestablished for 3 minutes in the following ways gt By turning the ignition off and on gt By turning voice control off and on gt Via the Bluetooth Visibility menu item in the information display Creating a connection with an already paired mobile phone After switching on the ignition the connection is automatically established for the already paired mobile phone Check on your mobile phone if the automatic connection has been established 1 Depending on the Bluetooth version on the mobile phone an automatically generated 6 digit PIN SSP is either displayed or the PIN 1234 has to be
318. on it is essential to comply with the warn ing instructions outlined below and with the general applicable safety rules The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area EJ warnine The following instructions must be followed before starting work in the en gine compartment Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key a Firmly apply the handbrake a f the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox move the gearshift lever into Neutral or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox move the selec tor lever into position P a Allow the engine to cool Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment risk of scalding Wait until no more steam or coolant is escaping FJ warnine The following instructions must be followed when working in the engine com partment Keep children clear of the engine compartment Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm The fan might suddenly start running Inspecting and replenishing 201 HE WARNING Continued Do not touch any hot engine parts risk of burns a The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health a Avoid contact with the coolant Coolant vapours are harmful to health Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the en gine is still warm The cooling system is pressurized When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoi
319. on on the following subjects B5E 0091 Front interior light 54 re Rear interior light 55 Pa 2 Keere ele Rear tetera 2 First read and observe the introductory information given on page 54 Front door warning light 56 Co Entry lighting 56m Switching on the light gt Press the button in the area of the symbol Fig 36 Switching off the light gt Press the button in the area of the symbol O Fig 36 Operating with the door contact switch gt Place the button in the middle position On vehicles without an interior monitor the middle position is marked with the symbol Fig 36 A 54 Using the system Switching the reading light on off Switching the reading light on off gt Press the button 7 or Fig 37 gt Press the button 7 or Fig 38 If operating the light with the door contact switch is enabled the light will come on when one of the following events occurs gt The vehicle is unlocked gt One of the doors or the tailgate is opened Applies to vehicles with a panoramic sliding roof gt The ignition key is removed Fle Interior lights at the rear If operating the light with the door contact switch is enabled the light will go off when one of the following events occurs gt The vehicle is locked gt The ignition is switched on gt About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed i Note a f the interior light remains switched on when the ignition is switc
320. ons counter 9 Entry lighting 56 Environment 140 Environmental compatibility 143 Environmentally friendly driving 140 ESC Operation 147 Warning light 17 Extending variable loading floor 89 Fixing set 91 Movable lashing eyes 92 Partial extension 90 Index 255 F Fasteners 84 Fatigue detection 158 Information messages 159 Operation 159 Films 192 Fire extinguisher 221 First aid kit 221 Floor covering Fixing 85 Fog lights 52 Fog lights with the CORNER function 52 Folding hook 85 Footmats 136 Footmats 136 See Footmats 136 Force limit Electric tailgate Superb Combi 38 Power windows 43 Sliding tilting roof 44 Sliding tilting roof Superb Combi 46 Front airbag 178 Front door warning light 56 Front interior light 54 Fuel 199 Diesel 200 Fuel gauge 10 gauge 10 refer to Fuel 199 Refuelling 199 Unleaded petrol 200 Fuel consumption 140 Fuses Colour coding 237 Fuse assignment in the engine compartment __ 239 Occupancy 237 256 Index G Gear Recommended gear 22 Gear changing Energy efficient driving 141 Gearshift lever 136 General view Cockpit 7 Glasses storage box 78 Glow plug system Warning light 18 GSM 109 112 H Handbrake 135 Hands free system Voice control 120 Hazard warning light system 53 HBA 149 Head airbag 180 Headlight cleaning system Headlight cleaning system 61 Headligh
321. ontrol system must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces such as icy roads slippery roads loose gravel risk of accident The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current traffic conditions a Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the system being switched on unintentionally CAUTION The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving in areas with steeper gradients The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels In such cases select a lower gear or brake the vehicle using the footbrake a The cruise control system cannot be activated when first gear or reverse gear is selected vehicles with manual transmission a The cruise control system cannot be activated when the selector lever is in po sitions P N or R vehicles with automatic transmission a The cruise control system may automatically switch off when some brake assist systems e g ESC intervene when the maximum permissible engine speed is ex ceeded etc Activating deactivating Fig 140 Operating lever Rocker switch and switch of the cruise control system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 155 Activating gt Turn the switch A Fig 140 into the ON position Deactivating gt Turn the switch A Fig 140 into the OFF position Storing and maintaining speed Firs
322. ooster may be impaired risk of accident a f a front spoiler full wheel trim etc is mounted retrospectively it must be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced The front brakes may overheat which can have a negative impact on the functioning of the braking system risk of accident a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle The children might for ex ample release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear The vehicle could then start to move risk of accident CAUTION a Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads page 140 a Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not neces sary This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear Information for braking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 134 If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system consid ers the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic the brake light flashes automatically After the speed was reduced below around 10 km h or the vehicle was stopped the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again Before travelling a long distance with a steep gradient reduce speed and shift in to the next lowest gear As a
323. or jerky loads There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a vehicle which is not standing on a paved road a Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes page 231 Front tow ing eye or page 231 Rear towing eye to the detachable ball head of the tow ing equipment page 160 a The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle a We recommend using a tow rope from KODA Original Accessories which is available from a SKODA Partner a Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice Both drivers should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in a When towing respect the national legal provisions especially those which re late to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed Front towing eye Rear towing eye Fig 190 Front bumper Removing the cap installing the towing eye Coy First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 230 gt Remove the cap from the front bumper Fig 190 A gt Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop Fig 190 B and tighten as much as possible For tightening purposes we recommend
324. or the fuse box in the en gine compartment fer W BsT 0615 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 237 On some vehicles the battery cover must be removed before removing the cover for the fuse box page 211 Replacing fuses gt The safety catch of the cover of the fuse box A Fig 202 Move the arrow The symbol is displayed behind the clip gt Remove the cover gt Replace the appropriate fuse gt Replace the cover on the fuse box and the safety clip A move against the ar row The symbol is displayed behind the clip The cover is locked into position Fuse assignment in the engine compartment Fig 203 Schematic diagram of the fuse box version A version B First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 237 Fuse assignment in the engine compartment version A Power consumer 1 Front right main headlight right tail light 2 Valves for ABS 3 4 Not assigned 5 Horn 6 12 Not assigned 13 Control unit for automatic gearbox 14 Not assigned 15 Coolant pump 16 Not assigned 17 Instrument cluster windscreen wiper lever and turn signal lever 18 Audio amplifier sound system 19 Radio Fuses and light bulbs 239 Power consumer Not assigned Engine control unit Data bus control unit Not assigned Fuel dosage valve Engine contr
325. ormation given on page 100 The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car Recommended setting for all periods of the year gt Set the required temperature between 18 C and 26 C we recommend 22 C gt Press the button AUTO Fig 110 on page 100 gt Move the air outlet vents 2 and 3 Fig 107 on page 96 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards After pressing the indicator light in the top right or left corner of the button AVTO lights up depending on which mode was last selected If the warning light in the top right corner of the button AUTO lights up the Clima tronic operates in HIGH mode The HIGH mode is the standard setting of the Climatronic When pressing again the button AUTO the Climatronic changes into the LOW mode and the indicator light in the top left corner lights up The Climatronic uses only in this mode the lower blower speed However taking into account the noise level this is more comfortable yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air con ditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied By pressing the button AUTO again it is changed to HIGH mode Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air distribution or by increasing decreasing the blower speed Switching the cooling system on off AA First read and observe the intr
326. osition is stor ed page 68 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manually adjusting the front seats 66 Electric front seat adjustment 66 Headrests 67 Memory function of electrically adjustable seat 68 Memory function of the remote control key 68 The driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs The seat backrest on the driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important gt for safely and quickly reaching the controls gt for a relaxed body position that reduces fatigue gt for achieving maximum protection from the seat belts and the airbag system FJ warnine Caution when adjusting the seat You may suffer injuries or bruises as a re sult of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention The electric front seat adjustment is still functional if the ignition is switch ed off even with the ignition key removed Therefore children should never be left unattended in the vehicle The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving as this will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle a Each occupant must correctly
327. ove the number plate Opening gt Press the handle 1 Fig 21 on the bottom edge of the boot lid gt Wait until the brake light 2 in the rear window flashes twice and then lift the lid Closing gt Pull down and strike the lid with the handle 3 Fig 21 Unlocking and opening 37 Superb Combi B3T 0581 Fig 23 Handle in the inner panelling of the boot lid First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 36 After unlocking the boot lid can be opened with the handle above the number plate Opening gt Press the handle A Fig 22 and raise the lid in the direction of the arrow B Closing gt Pull the lid down with the handle C Fig 23 and close with a slight swing 38 Using the system Automatic locking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 36 If the vehicle was locked before the boot lid was closed the lid is immediately locked automatically when closed The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by a specialist garage Delayed locking If the tailgate was locked using the lt s symbol button on the remote control key it is possible to open the tailgate within a limited period of time There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked au tomatically The vehicle should therefore always be locked with the symbol but ton amp on
328. over 1 Fig 171 in a plastic cover 2 Fig 171 or in the left side of the boot Fig 92 on page 87 When working on the battery the edge of the polyester battery cover 1 Fig 171 is inserted between the battery and the side wall of the battery cov er Battery in the engine compartment gt Open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow 1 or press the interlock on the side of the battery cover in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 171 fold the cover up and remove The battery cover is installed in reverse order Battery in the boot The battery is located in the left side compartment with the symbol 4 Fig 92 on page 87 Checking the battery electrolyte level j Fig 172 Vehicle battery Electrolyte level indicator First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 209 On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator the so called magic eye Fig 172 the electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change in colour Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check gt Black colour electrolyte level is correct gt Colourless or light yellow colour electrolyte level too low the battery must be replaced Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for checking the energy level for the recurring engin
329. over take out battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 232 The battery is located under a cover A Fig 192 We recommend having the key batteries replaced by a specialist garage Howev er if you would like to replace the discharged battery yourself proceed as follows gt Flip out the key gt Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver in the region of the arrows 1 gt Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down in the region of the arrow 2 gt Insert the new battery gt Place the battery cover on the key and press it down until it clicks into place ay Note The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the remote control key after replacing the battery page 233 a If a key has an affixed decorative cover this will be destroyed when the battery is replaced A replacement cover can be purchased from a SKODA Partner First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings M on page 232 If the vehicle does not unlock when pressing the remote control the key may not be synchronised This can occur when the buttons on the remote control key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery in the remote control key was replaced Synchronise the key as follows gt Press any button on the remote control
330. owed vehicle gt Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that the turn signal lights horn windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can be used gt Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the ve hicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox 230 Do it yourself Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the en gine is running If the engine is not running significantly more physical force is re quired to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle If using a tow rope ensure that it is always kept taught CAUTION Do not tow start the engine there is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 228 Jump starting a f the gearbox no longer contains any oil because of a defect your vehicle must only be towed with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground or on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer a The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km a To protect both vehicles when tow starting or towing the tow rope should be elastic Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a simi larly elastic material a While towing take care to avoid impermissibly high tensile forces
331. owing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill gt Snow chains are mounted gt The spare wheel is mounted gt One wheel per axle was changed Wheels 217 EI warnine a When the indicator light illuminates immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and inspect the tyres and their inflation pressure a Under certain circumstances e g sporty style of driving wintry or unpaved roads the warning light may light up after a delay or not at all CAUTION a The tyre control display does therefore not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control as the system cannot detect an even loss of pressure a The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss e g in case of sudden tyre damage In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill without sudden steering movements or sharp braking To ensure a proper functioning of the tyre control display it is necessary to re peat the basic setting every 10000 km or once a year Spare wheel Fig 176 Boot Spare wheel B3T 0429 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is fixed in place with a special bolt Fig 176 Take out the wheel gt Open the boot lid gt Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment gt Remove the b
332. ox with the tool kit gt Unscrew the bolt Fig 176 in a counterclockwise direction 218 General Maintenance gt Take out the wheel Stow the wheel gt Stow the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well with the rim facing down gt Screw the bolt Fig 176 in a clockwise direction until the wheel is safely se cured gt Replace the box with the tool kit back into the spare wheel gt Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment gt Close the boot lid Fit a wheel in the appropriate dimensions and design as soon as possible If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to the vehicle e g winter tyres or low profile tyres it must only be used briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is adop ted H Temporary spare wheel A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel Please note the following if you intend to use this wheel gt The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel gt Be particularly observant when driving gt The inflation pressure for the temporary spare wheel is identical to the maxi mum inflation pressure for the standard tyres gt Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage as it is not intended for long term use F WARNING a Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged a f the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wh
333. page 204 The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine Fig 168 Checking the oil level Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature gt Switch off the engine Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough gt Open the bonnet gt Pull out the dipstick gt Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop gt Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level Oil level within range A No oil must be refilled Oil level within range Oil can be refilled Afterwards the oil level can lie in the range A Oil level within range The engine must be topped up with oil so that the oil level at least reaches the range B The engine consumes a little oil The oil consumption may be as much as 0 5 I 1000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you operate your vehicle Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the first 5 000 kilometres 206 General Maintenance The oil level must be checked at regular intervals We recommend after each time you refuel or prior to making a long journey We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A but not above if the engine has been operating at high loads for example during a lengthy motor way trip during the summer months towing a trailer or negotiating a high moun tain pass The indicator light in the
334. park the vehicle in such a way that the exhaust gases can come into contact with highly flammable materials e g dry grass or easily inflammable substances e g spilt fuel risk of fire CAUTION a Running auxiliary heating aux heating consumes fuel from the vehicle tank and automatically controls the filling level If only a low quantity of fuel is present in the fuel tank the auxiliary heating aux heating switches off a The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating aux heating which is located on the underside of the vehicle must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked a If the auxiliary heating aux heating is running the vehicle battery discharges If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a longer period the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres in order to recharge the vehicle battery The air conditioning system 103 i Note a The auxiliary heating aux heating switches the blower on only if it has ach ieved a coolant temperature of approx 50 C At low outside temperatures this can result in a formation of water vapour in the area of the engine compartment This is quite normal and is not an operating problem a The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free e g of ice snow or leaves to ensure that the auxiliary heating aux heating operates properly a So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the auxili ary
335. pecifications can significantly reduce the corrosion protection a Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can conse quently result in major engine damage Do not fill the coolant above the mark A Fig 169 on page 208 a f a fault causes the engine to overheat we recommend visiting a specialist ga rage as otherwise serious engine damage may occur Capacity First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 207 Coolant capacity Petrol engines 1 4 Itr 92 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI 3 6 1 191 kW FSI Capacities in litres Diesel engines Capacities in litres 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR 8 4 2 0 ltr 103 kW TDI CR 8 4 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR 8 4 Inspecting and replenishing 207 Checking the coolant level Fig 169 Engine compartment Coolant expansion reservoir B3T 0418 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 207 The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment Inspecting the coolant level gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle Fig 169 Coolant level within range A No coolant may be added The level may also rise slightly above the A marking when the engine is hot Coolant level within range A and Coolant may be added
336. perated switch page 182 Deactivating the front passenger airbag We recommend that you ask a SKODA service partner to deactivate any other air bags Monitoring the airbag system The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically includ ing when one of the airbags is switched off Airbag deactivated using diagnostic equipment gt The warning light 2 lights up for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then flashes again for approximately 12 seconds Front passenger airbag deactivated using the key switch in the storage com partment gt The warning light 2 lights up for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on gt Warning light OFF 2 3 Fig 159 on page 182 lights up after the ignition is switched on fi Note The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed a A SKODA service partner will be able to inform you which if any of your vehi cle s airbags can or must be deactivated 182 Safety Deactivating the front passenger airbag PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF y Fig 159 Key switch for front passenger airbag warning light for front pas senger airbag activation deactivation AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 181 Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the storage box on the front passenger s
337. pped with the universal telephone preinstallation at the factory The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current tele phone If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated Button wheel Action Operation 1 Press briefly Mute MUTE 4 1 Turn upwards Increase the volume 1 Turn downwards Decrease the volume Communication and multimedia 107 Button wheel Action Operation Accept call End call E Display telephone s basic menu Telephone main menu List of dialled numbers Call selected contact Press and hold button Reject the incoming call Turn up down Previous next menu item Press briefly Confirm selected menu item Press and hold button Continuously display first letter of the phone book Quickly turn upwards To the previous initial letter in the telephone book Quickly turn downwards To the next initial letter in the telephone book Press briefly Return to a previous level on menu ESS CE S Press and hold button Exit telephone menu Symbols in the information display Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 106 Importance Valid for Charge status of the phone battery GSM II GSM III Signal strength GSM II GSM III A phone is connected with the hands free system GSM II GSM IlI when connected via the HFP profile The hands
338. process gt Disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order to the one described above Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V The capacity Ah of the battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the dis charged battery in your vehicle Jump start cables Only use jump start cables which have an adequately large cross section and in sulated terminal clamps Observe the manufacturer s instructions Positive cable colour coding in the majority of cases is red Negative cable colour coding in the majority of cases is black Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Fig 188 Engine compartment Earth First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 228 On vehicles with the START STOP system the jump start cable must only be con nected to the engine earthing point Fig 188 Jump starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot Fig 189 Detail of the engine compart ment Jump starting point B3T 0671 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 228 On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the boot the positive terminal of the bat tery supplying the power can only be connected to the jump starting point in the engine compartment of the vehicle being started by means of a jump start ca ble Fig 189 gt Open the protective cap of the jump starting point in the
339. produced by the activation of the brake pedal for approx 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds it starts to roll back The HHC is active on slopes of 5 and steeper provided that the driver s door is closed HHC is only ever active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off When driving downhill it is inactive CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation SS 50 Visual parking system 150 FJ wARNING The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver s responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres Pay particular attention to small children and animals as they may not be recognised by the system sensors Before reversing you should make sure that there are no small obstacles such as rocks thin posts trailer drawbars etc in front or behind your vehicle Such obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors a Under certain circumstances surfaces of certain objects and types of cloth ing cannot reflect the system signals Thus these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the System sensors a External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the system Under adverse conditions this may cause objects o
340. r cover it with a cloth to protect your face hands and arms from hot steam or hot cool ant a f any coolant splashes into your eyes immediately rinse out your eyes with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible a Always store the coolant additive securely in its original container and in particular out of the reach of children risk of poisoning f coolant is swallowed consult a doctor immediately Do not leave any items such as cloths or tools in the engine compartment a Never spill fluids on the hot engine Such fluids e g the antifreeze con tained in the coolant may ignite FI WARNING The following warning instructions must be observed at all times when work ing in the engine compartment while the engine is running a Pay particular attention to rotating engine parts e g V ribbed belt genera tor radiator fan and the high voltage ignition system risk to life m Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system a Avoid short circuits in the electrical system particularly on the vehicle s battery a Always make sure that no jewellery loose clothing or long hair can get caught in rotating engine parts risk to life Always remove any jewellery tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any work FI warnine The following warning instructions must be observed if work has to be carried out on the fuel or electrical systems a Always disconnect the vehicle battery
341. r turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash i Note If the battery has been disconnected the indicator light illuminates after the ignition is switched on The indicator light must go out after driving a short dis Further information page 50 Turn signal and main beam m W tance z First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low the indicator light amp comes on First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Top up with liquid page 204 Windscreen washer system ings H on page 13 The following message appears in the information display The indicator light comes on when the fog lights are operating page 52 E Top up wash fluid m First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 ings H on page 13 N l l The indicator light comes on when the cruise control is operating page 155 m If the indicator light is slit the brake pads are worn The following message appears in the information display Check brake wear m First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Seek help from a specialist garage E ings H on page 13 If the indicator light l
342. r for the power socket Fig 72 gt Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket The 12 volt power sockets and any connected appliances can also be operated when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn H FJ warninc Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can cause fires burns and other serious injuries Never leave children unattended in the vehicle a f the connected electric device becomes too hot switch it off and discon nect it from the power supply immediately CAUTION The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical accesso ries with a power uptake of up to 120 watt a Never exceed the maximum power consumption otherwise the vehicle s elec trical system can be damaged a Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle a Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power sockets Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the applicable directives a Switch off the devices connected to the power sockets before you switch the ignition on or off and before starting the engine to avoid damage from voltage fluctuations Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices Storage compartment under the armrest Fig 73 Armrest Stowage compartment B3T 0635 First read and observe the introductory information
343. r people to not be recognised by the system CAUTION a f a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and there is no obstacle close to your car this indicates a system fault The fault is also indicated by the Pu symbol flashing in the Fig 136 on page 150 button Have the fault rectified by a specialist garage The sensors must be kept clean free of ice etc to enable the system to oper ate properly Note A a The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory set to be higher than for rear obstacle recognition a The parking aid tones can be adjusted via the information display in the Assis tants menu item page 27 a f the system is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is in position P the vehicle cannot move the warning tone is interrupted and no ob stacles are displayed a Additionally installed modules such as bicycle carriers can impair the function of the parking aid Assist systems 149 Operation Fig 136 Parking aid Range of sensors parking aid button on vehicles with front and rear sensors First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 149 The parking aid hereafter referred to solely as system only works when the igni tion is switched on The system assists the driver by giving acoustic signals and displaying informa tion on the screen of the navigation system or the radio when park
344. r possible to support your body Even if you only drive at a speed of 30 50 km h the forces that your body is ex posed to in the event of an accident can exceed a metric ton 1000 kg For example a person s weight of 80 kg increases to 4 8 tons 4800 kg at 50 km h In the event of a frontal collision occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt are thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the car such as steering wheel dash panel or windscreen Fig 150 A In certain circum stances you could even be thrown out of the vehicle which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries It is also important that rear passengers fasten their seat belts as they could oth erwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only to himself but also for those seated at the front Fig 150 Fastening and unfastening seat belts BNH 0111 Fig 152 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt Rout ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 171 Fasten gt Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat belt page 168 gt Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis gt Insert the l
345. r the sensor 2 at the same time as the sensor 1 Fig 15 when un locking the vehicle it is not unlocked If the vehicle is locked via the sensor 1 it will not be possible to unlock it again in the following 2 seconds via the sensor 2 prevents accidental unlocking The KESSY system can find the valid key even if it was left in the front of the ve hicle s roof for example D Fig 15 It is therefore not always necessary to know where the key is Always check to see whether the vehicle is locked Further information about the KESSY system page 34 CAUTION a Do not use objects which might prevent direct contact between the hand and the sensor a Some types of gloves can impair the function of the grip sensor a After leaving the vehicle it does not lock automatically the procedure for lock ing the vehicle must therefore be observed a f the battery in the key is weak or discharged the vehicle may not be unlocked or locked via the KESSY system In this case use the emergency unlocking or emergency locking on the driver s door page 233 Safe securing system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 29 The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the outside Afterwards it is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the outside This fact is pointed out by the following message on the display
346. ra dio or navigation system The AUX IN input is located in the storage compartment below the front armrest and is marked with AUX The MDI input is located in the storage compartment below the front armrest 125 Communication and multimedia CD change Fig 118 The CD changer AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 124 The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the right side compartment of the boot Inserting the CD gt Touch the button C Fig 118 and guide the CD compact disc into the CD case B The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the CD changer The indicator light in the corresponding button D stops flashing Filling the CD changer with CDs gt Press and hold the button C Fig 118 for longer than 2 seconds and guide the CDs one after the other maximum 6 CDs into the CD case B The indicator lights in the buttons D stop flashing Inserting a CD at a specific position gt Press the button C Fig 118 The indicator lights in the buttons D illuminate the memory spaces that are already assigned and flash in the case of free mem ory spaces gt Touch the desired button D and guide the CD into the CD case B Ejecting a CD gt Press the button A Fig 118 to eject a CD For assigned memory spaces the indicator lights now illuminate in the buttons D gt Press the corresponding button D The
347. rchased from SKODA Original Accessories Inserting the adapter and mobile phone gt First of all push the adapter A in the direction of the arrow Fig 114 up to the stop into the mount Then press the adapter slightly downwards until it locks securely into position gt Insert the mobile phone into the adapter A as specified in the instructions from the manufacturer of the adapter Removing the adapter and mobile phone gt Simultaneously press the locks on the mount Fig 114 and remove the adapter with the mobile phone CAUTION Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interrup tion of the connection When removing the mobile phone the connection to the factory fitted antenna is interrupted which reduces the quality of the transmit ting and receiving signal The charging of the mobile phone battery is also inter rupted Managing telephone calls with the help of the adapter Fig 115 Principle sketch Adapter with one button adapter with two but tons Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 109 Function overview of the 4J PTT push to talk button on the adapter Fig 115 gt Switch on off voice control gt Accept end a call On some adapters include the button A Fig 115 in addition to the button 4 After pressing this button for 2 seconds the number 112 Emergency call is dialled ie Note On vehicles fitted with the Colu
348. rd warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal require ments must be observed gt Let all of the occupants get out While changing a tyre the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier gt Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the se lector lever on the automatic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit page 226 gt If a trailer is connected uncouple it gt Remove the breakdown kit from the boot gt Stick the sticker 2 Fig 186 on page 226 on the dash panel in view of the driv er gt Unscrew the valve cap gt Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean sur face rag paper etc Sealing and inflating the tyre First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 226 Sealing gt Forcefully shake the tyre inflator bottle 10 Fig 186 on page 226 several times gt Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle fio in a clockwise direction The film on the cap is pierced automatically gt Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto the tyre valve gt Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing agent from the t
349. read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 29 Opening from the outside gt Unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle A Fig 18 on the door you wish to open Opening from the inside gt Pull door opening lever B on the door you wish to open Closing from the inside gt Grasp pull handle C and close the door E WARNING Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly while driving risk of death Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening closing range risk of injury An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the vehi cle is on an incline risk of injury 34 Using the system This chapter contains information on the following subjects Information message __ BA Parking vehicle 35m Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 34 Key in the vehicle The protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle unlocks the vehicle automatically if the following conditions are met v The vehicle including the boot lit has been locked v The key with which the vehicle has been locked remains in the vehicle in the zone D Fig 15 on page 31 The turn signal lights flash four times as confirmation that the vehicle has been unlocked again The following message is shown in the information cluster display Key in vehicle KEY IN VEHICLE Additio
350. rease CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Loading a trailer GB Driving with a trailer 164 Trailer stabilisation 165 Anti theft alarm system _ BS EJ wARNING Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer Loading a trailer First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 163 The vehicle trailer combination must be balanced whereby the maximum permis sible drawbar load must be utilised If the drawbar load is too low it jeopardises the performance of the vehicle trailer combination Distribution of the load Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as close to the axle as possible Secure the items from slipping The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trail er is laden Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination Tyre pressure Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a full load page 215 Service life of tyres Trailer load The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstan ces page 245 Technical data The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1000 metres above mean sea level Towing a trailer 163 The engine output falls as altitude increases as does the vehicle s climbing pow er Therefore for every additional 1000 m in height or part the ma
351. received Lights up orange for around 2 seconds then green or red The battery is weak however the switching on or off signal was received Lights up orange for around 2 seconds then flashes green or red The battery is weak however the switching on or off signal was not re ceived Flashes orange for around 5 seconds Replace the battery page 233 CAUTION The battery is discharged however the switching on or off signal was not re ceived The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must therefore be protected against water severe impacts and direct sunlight The air conditioning system 105 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Mobile phones and two way radio systems 106 Universal telephone preinstallation hands free 106 Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel 107 Symbols in the information display 108 Phone Phonebook 109 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 106 SKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two way radio systems with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power of up to 10 watts Please consult a SKODA Partner for information about the possibility of installing and operating mobile phones and two way radio systems with a transmission power of more than 10 W Operating
352. reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle Drive carefully and visit a specialist garage as soon as possible Note When the Tourist light mode is active the warning icon flashes for about 10 seconds each time the ignition is switched on Lights and visibility 51 v The daytime running lights are not switched on J The low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position AUTO and the low beam is switched on The fog lights are not switched on 7 i Note The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear a Fig 34 Light switch L AID r i p 7 k 2 B3T 0614 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 ings H on page 48 gs Hon pag Switching on off Switching on off gt Turn the light switch to position 20 or Fig 34 on page 52 gt Turn the light switch to position 20 or 2 Fig 34 gt Pull the light switch to position 2 gt Pull the light switch to position 1 The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse order The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse order The warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is The indicator light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are switched on page 13 switched on page 13 Only the rear fog light on the trailer lights up if
353. ren are not yet fully developed Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory provi sions Child seats complying with the ECE R 44 standard must be used ECE R stands for Economic Commission for Europe Regulation Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard are identified with a test mark that cannot be removed a large E within a circle with the test number be low EE WARNING a The national legal requirements must be observed when using child seats One should never carry children and also not babies on one s lap a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle Certain outside climatic con ditions can cause life threatening temperatures in the vehicle a The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey Other wise the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci dent causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants 184 Safety I WARNING Continued a Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehi cle is moving This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the air bag system is deployed a Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child
354. rging has been successful Switch off the charger and remove the mains cable from the power socket gt Only then disconnect the charger s terminal clamps gt Reconnect the cables to the battery first positive then negative 212 General Maintenance It is not necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge the ve hicle battery using low amperages for example from a mini charger Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer A charging current of 0 1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity or lower must be used until full charging is achieved It is necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with high amperages known as rapid charging The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging Replacing the vehicle battery When replacing a battery the new vehicle battery must have the same capacity voltage amperage and be the same size Suitable vehicle battery types can be purchased from a specialist garage We recommend having the battery replaced by a specialist garage where the new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be dis posed of in accordance with national regulations EI WARNING Quick charging the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge CAUTION On vehicles with the START STOP system the pole terminal of the charger must not be
355. riable loading floor page 90 This enlarges the space between the rear seats and the separation l CAUTION Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged Removing and refitting the variable loading floor 837 0661 SS B3T 0599 Fig 100 Boot remove variable loading floor First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 89 The variable loading floor can be removed and reinstalled if necessary Removing Grasp the rear part of the floor by the handle raise it slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 and pull it out over the bumper in the direction of the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening C Fold up the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow 3 Press the safety buttons A and remove the floor Install Fold up the floor and place it on the carrier rails Push the floor forwards until it engages in the openings B in the carrier rails F Carefully press in the vicinity of the openings C on the floor until it clicks into place if necessary press the safety buttons A FI warnine Ensure the variable loading floor is attached correctly during installation If this is not the case there is a risk of injury for the occupants Fixing set B3T 0662 Fig 101 Telescopic pole and tensioning strap First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 89 The fixing set can
356. ring tensioned position D Main beam off or headlight flasher ON spring tensioned position If you only wish to flash three times convenience turn signal briefly push the lever to the pressure point A or B and release again The Lane ch flash can be activated deactivated via the information display in the menu item Lane ch flash page 27 The main beam can be switched on when the low beam lights are on The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off 1 WARNING Only use the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will not be dazzled 50 Using the system i Note a The turn signal light switches itself off automatically when driving around a curve or after making a turn a The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal light fails Automatic driving lamp control Fig 33 Light switch B3T 0283 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 If the light switch is in position AUTO Fig 33 the parking lights low beam and number plate lights are switched on off automatically The light is regulated based on data gathered by the light sensor attached be tween the windscreen and the interior mirror If the light switch is in position AUTO the symbol AUTO lights up next to the light switch If the light is switched on automatically the symbol next to the light switch also
357. risks risk of accident a In the event of an ABS fault visit a specialist garage immediately Adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know the exact extent of the damage or the extent to which this is limiting the braking efficiency CAUTION All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufactur er to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly Changes to the vehicle e g to the engine brakes chassis can influence the functionality of the brake assist systems page 196 i Note If a fault occurs in the ABS system the ESC ASR and EDL will also not work An ABS fault is indicated by the warning light page 17 Electronic Stability Control ESC Fig 134 ESC system TCS button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 147 The ESC system helps improve control of the vehicle in situations where it is be ing operated at its dynamic limits such as a sudden change to the direction of travel Depending on the conditions of the road surface the risk of skidding is re duced thereby improving the vehicle s driving stability The ESC system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle In the event o
358. riv er s seat and the external mirrors assume the positions stored in the memory of this key Activating the function gt Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key gt Press and hold any memory button B Fig 56 on page 68 After the seat has assumed the position stored under this button at the same time press the but ton 8 on the remote control key within 10 seconds The successful activation of the function is confirmed by an audible signal The seat and external mirror positions which are already saved in the memory button are not saved in the memory of the key The seat can be adjusted to the required position if necessary page 66 After locking the vehicle the current positions of the driver s seat and the exter nal mirrors are saved in the memory of the remote control key Deactivating the function gt Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key gt Press and hold the button A Fig 56 on page 68 At the same time press the button 3 on the remote control key within 10 seconds The successful deactivation of the function is confirmed by an audible signal Stopping the ongoing adjustment gt Press any button on the driver s seat or the button 8 on the remote control key Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Seat heaters 69 Ventilated front seats 70 Convenience features of passenger seat ST Front armrest 71 Rear armrest 71
359. rmation given on page 140 The engine has to be run in during the first 1500 kilometres Up to 1 000 kilometres gt Do not drive faster than 3 4 of the maximum speed for the selected gear gt No full throttle gt Avoid high engine speeds gt Do not tow a trailer From 1000 up to 1 500 kilometres Gradually increase the driving performance up to the full speed of the selected gear The red scale of the rev counter indicates the range in which the system begins to limit the engine speed During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized The driving style which you adopt during the first approx 1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running in your car Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running in period On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox at the very latest shift up into the next gear when the red area is reached Very high engine speeds when accelerating depressing the accelerator pedal are automatically restricted M In vehicles with manual transmission do not drive at unnecessarily low engine speeds Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly Ob serve the recommended gear page 22 Recommended gear 140 Driving CAUTION a The engine is not protected from excessive engine revs caused by shifting down at the wrong time This can result in a sudden increase in
360. roductory information and safety warn ings H on page 241 gt Unlock the protective cap in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 207 and remove s l l gt Turn the plug with bulb C counter clockwise until the stop and remove it Replacing bulb for main beam and daytime running lights gt Change the bulb gt Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn in a clockwise direction until Fig 206 the stop Halogen headlight Replacing gt Insert the protective cap in holder 2 and carefully push in the bulb for main beam and sep gt The protective cover must engage firmly arate daytime running lights ae B3T 0558 242 Do it yourself Fig 209 Replacing the light bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 241 Removing the protective grille gt Release the protective grille in the area of the arrow Fig 208 A using the clamp for removing the wheel trims page 222 Car tool gt Remove the protective grille in the direction of the arrow 1 Changing light bulbs for fog lights gt Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the fog lamp Fig 208 gt Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 2 gt Remove the connector gt Turn bulb holder A Fig 209 in an anti clockwise direction up to the stop and remove gt Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb into the headlight and turn in a clock wise direction as far as
361. rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 191 6000 350 2500 5000 6 3597 Performances Superb DSG6 4x4 Superb DSG6 4x4 Top speed km h 250 250 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 6 4 6 5 Permissible trailer load braked kg Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 7714400 250 1500 2500 4 1598 Performances Superb MG6 Superb DSG7 Superb Combi MG6 Superb Combi DSG7 Top speed km h 194 197 193 192 195 192 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 12 1 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 3 12 3 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1500 17009 1200 1400 1500 1700 1200 1400 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 750 a GreenLine b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 250 Technical data 2 0 ltr 103 kW TDI CR engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 103 4200 320 1750 2500 4 1968 Performances Superb MG6 Superb DSG6 Superb MG6 4x4 Superb Combi MG6 Superb Combi DSG6 Superb Combi MG6 4x4 Top speed km h 212 212 210 211 210 208 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 0 10 1 10 3 10 1 10 2 10 4 Permissible trailer load braked kg 2000 2000
362. rs are folded back into the driving position after the rotary knob is turned from the position to a different one 64 Using the system Folding in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key gt If all the windows are closed press and hold the symbol button amp on the re mote control key for approx 2 seconds The exterior mirror is folded back into the driving position when the ignition is switched on Automatic dimming mirror The exterior mirrors are dimmed together with the automatic dimming interior mirror page 63 Tilting surface of front passenger mirror On vehicles fitted with the memory function for the driver s seat page 68 the surface of the mirror tilts down slightly when the reverse gear is engaged and the rotary knob is in the position R or in position Lon vehicles with right hand drive Fig 50 This provides an aid in seeing the kerb of the pavement when parking the car The mirror returns into its initial position after the rotary knob is moved out of the position R or position L on vehicles with right hand drive and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km h The tilt of the mirror surface can be activated deactivated via the information dis play in the menu item Mirror down page 27 Memory function for mirrors On vehicles fitted with a memory function for the driver seat the relevant setting for the exterior mirrors is also stored automatically when the seat p
363. rve the following instructions for the proper use of the seat belts a Never use one Seat belt to secure two persons including children The seatbelt must not be placed over a child who is sitting on the lap of another passenger The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to pro tect and the risk of injury increases The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly a Many layers of clothing and loose clothing e g a winter coat over a jacket do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts a It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts e g for shortening the belts for smaller persons The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position page 72 EI warnine Observe the following instructions for proper maintenance of the seat belts The belt webbing must always be kept clean Soiled belt webbing may im pair proper operation of the inertia reel page 196 The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself a Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the seat belts seat belt connections inertia reel or the lock is detected
364. s The three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal collision of a certain severity The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened The fastened three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal or side collision of a certain severity Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions side and rear end collisions in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front EI warnine a Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work must only be carried out by a specialist garage The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident If the belt tensioners have been deployed it is then necessary to replace the entire system Note a Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed This is not an indi cation of a fire in the vehicle a When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system it is impor tant to comply with national legal requirements SKODA service partners are fa miliar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed infor mation Seatbelts 175 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects System description 176 Airbag deployment 176 E WARNING An airbag can onl
365. s on page 56 Proceed as follows if you wish to replace the faulty rechargeable batteries your self gt Remove the lamp gt Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed object from the location of the lock off clips F Fig 41 on page 57 gt Remove the faulty rechargeable batteries from the lamp gt Insert the new rechargeable batteries gt Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it clicks into place CAUTION We recommend having faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a SKODA service partner If the lamp is not correctly opened it can be damaged SA For the sake of the environment Dispose of used rechargeable batteries in accordance with national legal provi Sions a Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batteries a The replacement rechargeable batteries must have the same specification as the original rechargeable batteries If other types of rechargeable batteries are used the power output can be reduced or it can lead to a malfunction of the lamp Lights and visibility 57 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Windscreen and rear window heater __ sC Ci CCSCSCtC lt CSC SsSC C S S S SB Sun visors 58 Sun screen 59 Sun screen in the rear doors 5D Windscreen and rear window heater PASSENGER AIR BAG Fig 42 Buttons
366. s a support The driver is not re leased from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers manually depending on the visibility conditions CAUTION a In cold temperatures and during the winter check before the journey or before switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor a If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the ignition is turned back on The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold temperatures be tween the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned back on again a Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the front or rear window Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving a f the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly there is a risk of damage to the windscreen a The ignition must not be switched on if the front windscreen wiper arms are fol ded out The wiper blades would move back into their rest position and while do ing so damage the paintwork of the bonnet a If there is an obstacle on the windscreen the wiper will try to push away the obstacle The wiper stops automatically after 5 attempts to eliminate the obsta cle in order to avoid a damage to the wiper Remove the the obstac
367. s antifreeze protection down to about 25 C In these coun tries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 40 Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 35 C In these coun tries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons the con centration of coolant additive can be increased up to a maximum of 60 anti freeze protection down to approx 40 C When refilling only use the same antifreeze written on the antifreeze expansion tank Fig 169 on page 208 EJ WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment page 201 Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to fill with coolant under the current circumstances Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage 1 The coolant capacity is approximately 1 greater on vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater auxiliary heating and ventilation CAUTION a The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must never be under 40 Over 60 of coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protection and cooling effect a Other coolant additives that do not comply with the correct s
368. s located in a vertical position to the area where the claw grasps the web Fig 184 A gt Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the ground EJ warnine a Only raise the vehicle at the attachment points a Choose a flat and firm surface for jacking the vehicle Securing wheels against theft Fig 185 Principle sketch Anti theft wheel bolt with adapter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 222 The anti theft wheel bolts can only be removed tightened with the aid of the adapter page 222 Car tool gt Insert the adapter B Fig 185 with its toothed side fully into the inner tooth ing of the safety wheel bolt A until the stop so that only the outer hexagon is jutting out gt Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop i Note Make a note of the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter or the rear side of the anti theft wheel bolt This number can be used to purchase a replacement adapter from SKODA Original Parts if necessary We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the vehicle It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit Emergency equipment and self help 225 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Breakdown kit _ 22 Preparations for using the breakdown kit 227 Sealing and inflat
369. s of the rocker switch A When the pushbutton B is briefly pressed the information you have selected is dis played Operating with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel gt Press and hold button C Fig 12to activate the MAIN MENU gt By briefly pressing the C button you will reach one level higher gt The individual menu options can be selected by pressing the adjustment wheel D The selected menu is displayed after briefly tapping the adjustment wheel You can select the following menu options MFD page 22 Audi Operating instructions for the radio Navigation Operating instructions for the navigation system Phone page 106 Aux heating page 103 Assistants page 158 Vehicle status page 12 Settings page 27 The Audio and Navigation menu items are only displayed when the factory fitted radio or navigation system is switched on The Aux heating menu item is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with fac tory fitted auxiliary heating The menu item Assistants is only displayed if the vehicle is fitted with fatigue de tection haa Note If warning messages are shown in the information display these messages must be confirmed with the button B on the windscreen wiper lever or with the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel to call up the main menu a If the information display is not activated at that moment the menu always shifts to
370. s then not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk to life a Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside for ex ample at road crossings EH Note a In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehi cle a f central locking fails the key only unlocks or locks the driver s door The other doors and the tailgate can be emergency locked or emergency released Emergency locking of the door page 233 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid page 234 Unlocking and opening 29 Fig 13 Remote control key First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 29 Two remote control keys are provided with the vehicle Fig 13 The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle The operating range of the remote control key is approx 30 m But this range of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak The remote control key has a fold open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine The spare key must by initialised by a specialist garage after repair or replace ment of the receiver u
371. s wear a seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child page 173 Fastening and unfastening seat belts a Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seat ed page 168 Correct seated position The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness FJ warnine Observe the following instructions for the correct routing of the seat belt a Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents a Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder on no account across your neck A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then sud denly held firm by the belt The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects e g specta cles ball point pens bunches of keys etc Such objects can cause injury FJ warninec Observe the following instructions for handling the seat belts The belt webbing must not be jammed in between at any point or twisted or chafe against any sharp edges Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it Seat belts 171 EI warnine Obse
372. safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 53 a If the warning light page 14is displayed together with warning light do not continue your journey Seek help from a specialist garage A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehicle s braking distance risk of accident The rear fog light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The warning light 0 comes on when the rear fog lights are operating page 52 Bulb failure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light comes on if a bulb is faulty gt within a few seconds of the ignition being switched on gt when switching on the defective light bulb Instruments and Indicator Lights 17 In the information display for example the following message appears INFORMATION Check front right low beam Adaptive headlights First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 If the indicator light flashes for 1 minute while driving or after switching on the ignition there is a problem with the adaptive headlights page 51 Exhaust inspection system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 If the indicator light lights up there is a fault in the exhaust insp
373. seat Fig 77 Front passenger seat Opening the storage compartment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 Opening gt Pull the handle to position 1 Fig 77 in the direction of the arrow The compartment opens in the direction of the arrow 2 Closing gt Grip the compartment by the handle and close in the opposite direction to that of the arrow 2 Fig 77 gt Hold onto the handle until the door is closed EJ wARNING The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea sons Seats and useful equipment 79 CAUTION The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1 5 kg in weight Clothes hook First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 The clothes hooks are located on the middle pillar of the vehicle and on the han dle of the headliner above each of the rear doors E WARNING a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this may reduce the effectiveness of head airbags Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg Storage pockets on the front seats 80 Using the system First read and o
374. sed fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine Note a To assist the combustion process of the soot particles we recommend that reg ularly driving over short distances should be avoided a Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce the life of the diesel particle filter A KODA service partner will be able to tell you which countries use diesel fuel with a high sulphur content a f the engine is turned off during the filter cleaning process or shortly after wards the cooling fan may turn on automatically for a few minutes fi Fuel reserve First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 The indicator light H will come on if the fuel level is less than 9 litres The following message appears in the information display Please refuel Range km Note The text in the information display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short distance Airbag system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 13 If the indicator light 2 lights up there is a fault in the airbag system The following message appears in the information display 0 Error Air bag The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off If a front side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using the vehicle system test
375. sed to increased risk of injury if it becomes nec essary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is de ployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated posi tion Correct seated position for the driver Fig 148 Correct seated position for the driver correct head restraint posi tion First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 168 For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting gt Position the steering wheel so that there is a gap of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the chest A Fig 148 and that the distance between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag is at least 10 cm B gt Adjust the driver s seat in the forward back direction so that the pedals can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs gt Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel can be reached with your arms at a slight angle gt Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head C gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 171 Manual driver seat adjustment page 66 Electrical driver seat adjustment page 66 Correct seated position for the front passenger First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 168
376. sharp objects in the nets risk of net damage B3T 0700 Folding hook First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 Fig 86 shine hooks Superb Superb Combi Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage such as bags etc are provi ded on both sides of the boot Folding forward gt Superb Press on the lower portion of the hook A and fold down direction of the arrow 1 Fig 86 gt Superb Combi Grip the hook B direction of the arrow and fold down in the di rection of arrow 2 Fig 86 CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7 5 kg Floor covering Fig 87 Fixing the floor covering Superb Superb Combi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 The raised floor covering of the luggage compartment can be fixed e g when handling the spare wheel gt Superb with the loop on a hook on the boot cover Fig 87 A gt Superb Combi with the hook on the frame of the tailgate Fig 87 Luggage net Fig 88 Luggage net B3T 0319 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 82 The luggage net is located on the underside of the luggage compartment cover The net is designed for transporting lighter objects Seats and useful equipment 85 EI WARNING Only store soft objects with a total weight of 1 5 kg
377. sible to operate the sliding tilting roof CAUTION a Always close the sliding tilting roof before disconnecting the battery a If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possible that the Sliding tilting roof does not operate correctly In this case turn the rotary switch to the switch position A Fig 28 on page 44 and push forward for about 10 seconds 44 Using the system Fig 28 Control dial for the sliding tilting roof First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings M on page 44 Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 28 When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the wind noise is reduced Open fully gt Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position spring tensioned po sition Tilting roof gt Turn the switch to position D Closing gt Turn the switch to position A Force limiter The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter If an obstacle e g ice pre vents closing the sliding tilting roof stops and opens completely The sliding tilt ing roof can be closed completely without the force limiter by turning the switch into position A Fig 28 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding tilting roof to close completely H E WARNING When closing the sliding tilting roof proceed with caution to avoid causing crushing injuries risk of injury CAUTI
378. sing is in operation Note In case of failure of the sliding tilting roof contact a specialist garage Unlocking and opening 47 Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Parking and low beam lights 48 Dayl dri lights DAY LIGHT 49 Turn signal and main beam 50 Automatic driving lamp control 50 Adaptive headlights AFS 51 Fog lights 52 Fog lights with the CORNER function 52 Rear fog light 52 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME 52 Hazard warning light system 53 Parking lights 54 Unless otherwise stated the lights only work when the ignition is switched on On models fitted with right hand steering the position of certain switches differs from that shown in Fig 31 on page 48 The symbols which mark the switch po sitions are identical The low beam continues to shine while the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in the position 20 or AUTO After switching off the ignition the low beam is switched off automatically and only the side lights come on The side light goes out after the ignition key is removed Keep the headlights lenses clean The following guidelines must be ob served page 192 Headlight lenses 48 Using the system EI WARNING a The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with national legal requirements a The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the lights The au
379. sired heating ventilation mode Starting time 1 Starting time 2 Starting time 3 for each pre set time the day and the time hour and minute can be set for switching on the auxiliary heating and ventilation An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when selecting the day If this empty position is selected the activation is per formed without taking into account the day Activate Activate pre set mode Deactivate Deactivate pre set mode Factory setting Restore factory setting Back Return to main menu Only one programmed pre set time can be active The last programmed pre set time remains active After the auxiliary heating aux heating automatically activates at the set time it is necessary to pre set a time again If the menu item Back is selected or no changes are made on the display for lon ger than 10 seconds the set values are stored but the pre set time is not activa ted The system switches itself off at the end of the running time set under the menu item Running time Note An indicator light on the button 3 Fig 111 is illuminated when the system is run ning Radio remote control Fig 112 Auxiliary heating aux heating Radio remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 103 Explanation of graphic A Aerial Warning light Switch on aux heating Switch off aux heating The transmitter and the ba
380. st not be more than 15 The freeze protection at this concentration is sufficient only to 5 C 204 General Maintenance CAUTION a Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added to the windscreen washer fluid a If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system only cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be added to the windscreen washer fluid Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when refill ing as this may cause contamination of the liquid transportation system leading in turn to a windscreen washer system malfunction CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Specifications and capacity 205 Checking the oil level 206 Replenishing 206 Changing 206 The engine has been factory filled with a high grade oil that can be use through out the year except in extreme climate zones The engine oils are undergoing continuous further development Thus the infor mation stated in this Owner s Manual is only correct at the time of publication SKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manufac turer We therefore recommend that the oil change be completed by a SKODA Service Partner The specifications VW standards stated in the following can be indicated sepa rately or together with other specifications on the bottle The oil capaci
381. st connect the battery s positive terminal followed by the negative terminal Under no circumstan ces must the battery cables be connected incorrectly risk of a cable fire a Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork risk of damage to the paintwork Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle battery housing from the effects of ultra violet light a f the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks the battery will discharge This is because certain electrical components consume electricity e g control units also in idle state Prevent the battery from discharging by discon necting the battery s negative terminal or continuously charging the battery with a very low charging current a f the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips the vehicle battery will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge SA For the sake of the environment A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations i Note You should replace batteries older than 5 years Battery cover Fig 171 Engine compartment Polyester cover of the vehicle battery plastic cover of the vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 209 The battery is located in the engine compartment in a polyester c
382. stabilisation is an extension of the stabilisation control that works in conjunction with the counter steering assistance to reduce the amount the trail er sways After turning on the ignition the ESC indicator light amp in the instrument cluster lights up for about 2 seconds longer than the ABS indicator light Function requirements for trailer stabilisation vV The coupling device was factory fitted or purchased from the KODA Original Accessories v The ESCis active Warning lights 2 or amp do not illuminate in the instrument cluster v The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer sock et V The speed is higher than approx 60 km h v The trailer has a rigid drawbar FJ warninc The increased safety offered by the trailer stabilisation must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise CAUTION a The trailer stabilisation need not be able to correctly detect all of driving situa tions a Light trailers that sway are not always detected and therefore stabilised accord ingly by the trailer stabilisation a Release the pressure on the accelerator pedal if the system is being regulated a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres Note The trailer stabilisation works for both braked and unbraked trailers Anti theft alarm system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 163 When the vehicle is locked the alarm is a
383. steering wheel with telephone control or a phone mount and adapter a On vehicles that are factory fitted with the Columbus navigation system it is only possible to operate the voice control for the telephone via this device Op erating instructions for the Columbus navigation system chapter Voice control for the navigation system Voice commands GSM II Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 120 Basic voice commands Voice command Action HELP After this command the system repeats all possible commands CALL XYZ This command calls up the contact from the phone book After this command for example the phone book PHONE BOOK can be repeated back to you a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted etc CALL HISTORY Lists of dialled numbers missed calls etc After this command a telephone number can be en DIAL NUMBER tered in order to establish a connection with the re quested party REDIAL After this command the system calls the last dialled number MUSIC Play music from the mobile phone or another paired device FURTHER OPTIONS After this command the system offers additional context dependent commands Voice command Action SETTINGS CANCEL Selection for setting Bluetooth dialogue etc The dialogue is ended a On vehicles fitted with the Amundsent navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi gation sys
384. stem as this might result in the airbag being deployed a Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed from old cars or have been recycled a Never install damaged airbag parts in the vehicle The airbags may then not be deployed properly or even at all in the event of an accident a No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system EI WARNING a A change to the vehicle s wheel suspension including the use of non ap proved wheels and tire combinations can alter the functioning of the airbag system risk of accident and fatal injury a Never make any changes to the front bumper or the bodywork 198 General Maintenance EI wARNING The airbag control unit operates using pressure sensors located in the front doors For this reason no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or door panels e g installation of additional loudspeakers Resulting damage can have a negative impact on the function of the airbag system Any work on the front doors and door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage The following instructions must be observed a Never drive with inner door panels removed a Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the re sulting openings have not been properly sealed a Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed unless the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed a Always make sure that the openings are cover
385. sult a specialist garage for any questions relating to fluids a Fluids with the correct specifications can be purchased from SKODA Original Ac cessories Opening and closing the bonnet Fig 165 Bonnet release lever release lever First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 201 Opening gt Pull the release lever under the dash panel 1 Fig 165 Before opening the bonnet ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the windscreen otherwise the paintwork could be dam aged gt Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow 2 and the bonnet is un locked gt Grasp the bonnet and lift up until it is held open by the pressurised gas spring Closing gt Pull the bonnet down far enough to overcome the force of the pressurised gas Spring gt Close the bonnet from a height of approximately 20 cm with a slight swing Check that the bonnet is closed properly Engine compartment overview ag B3T 0569 Fig 166 Principle sketch Engine compartment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 201 1 Coolant expansion reservoir 208 2 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 204 3 Engine oil filler opening 206 4 Engine oil dipstick 206 5 Brake fluid reservoir 209 Battery below a cover 209 6 bit Note The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of p
386. system a The use of unsuitable fuel additives can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system Diesel fuel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 199 Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel which complies with the standard EN 590 standard DIN 51628 in Germany standard ONORM C 1590 in Austria GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 in Russia All diesel engines can be operated with diesel fuel with a maximum content of 7 bio fuel B7 which complies with the standard DIN 52638 in Germany in Austria C 1590 in France EN 590 For the Indian market your vehicle can run only on diesel fuel compliant with standard IS 1460 Bharat IV If diesel fuel which complies with this standard is not available you can refuel with diesel fuel according to standard IS 1460 Bharat III in case of emergency Operation in winter Winter grade diesel fuel In the cold season only use winter grade diesel fue properly even at a temperature of 20 C which will still operate It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic KODA Partners and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with information re garding the diesel fuels available Preheating fuel The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system This secures operation of a veh
387. t change this position while driving Also advise your passengers to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is mov ing a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and a dis tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard a When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed a Ensure that there are no objects in the driver s footwell as they may get caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate EI warnine As the front passenger observe the following instructions a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to proper ly protect you hazard Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be expo
388. t read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 155 gt Activate the cruise control system page 155 gt Drive at the desired speed gt Push the rocker button B into the SET Fig 140 on page 155 position After you have released the rocker button B out of the position SET the speed you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the accelerator Assist systems 155 Changing the stored speed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 155 Increasing the speed with the rocker button gt Push the rocker button B into the RES Fig 140 on page 155 position The speed will increase continuously if the rocker button is pressed and held in the RES position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory Decreasing the speed using the rocker button The stored speed can be reduced by pushing the rocker button B into the SET Fig 140 on page 155 position The speed will decrease continuously if the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than 25 km h the speed is not stored and the memory is erased Once the speed of the vehicle has increased to more than 25 km h the speed must the
389. t to a stop or use the engine brake if you can see that the next set of traffic lights is on red for example Economical gear changing Fig 130 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km depending on the selected gear First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 Shifting up early saves on fuel Manual gearbox gt Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear gt Shift up into the next gear at approx 2000 rpm An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early Observe the recommended gear page 22 Recommended gear A suitably selected gear can have an effect on fuel consumption Fig 130 Automatic gearbox gt Slowly apply the accelerator pedal However do not depress it to the kickdown position gt An economic driving programme is automatically selected if the accelerator ped al is only depressed slowly Starting off and Driving 141 Avoiding full throttle 1 100 km Fig 131 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km and speed in km h km h O 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 Driving more slowly saves fuel Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consump tion but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehi cle The maximum speed of yo
390. tail light Adapter for anti theft wheel bolts Towing eye Clamps for removing the wheel trims Car jack Crank for the jack Wheel wrench Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps Replacement bulb set FN RS ES Screw the car jack back into its initial position after use in order to store it back in the box with the vehicle tool kit EI warninec a The factory supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle Under no circumstances use it to lift heavier vehicles or other loads risk of injury a Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot a Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Preliminary work 223 Changing a wheel 223 Follow up work 224 Loosening tightening wheel bolts gt 224 Raising the vehicle 225 Securing wheels against theft 225 EJ warninec a If you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal re quirements must be observed a Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible a The following instructions must be followed if the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres or rims that differ from the factory fitted ones page 216 New tyres EI warnine Observe the following instructions for l
391. tch Fig 129 briefly towards the steering wheel Temporarily switch to manual gear changing in mode D or S gt Pull one of the rocker switches briefly towards the steering wheel Fig 129 If one of the rocker switches is not pulled for more than 1 minute manual gear changing is deactivated The temporary switch to manual gear changing can also be deactivated by pulling the right hand rocker switch towards the steer ing wheel for more than 1 second When accelerating the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached If a lower gear is selected the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrevving Note It may be beneficial for example when travelling downhill to use manual shifting of gears Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence the wear of the brakes page 134 Starting off and driving First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 136 Starting off gt Start the engine gt Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal gt Press and hold the lock button Fig 128 on page 137 gt Move the selector lever into the desired position page 137 and then release the lock button gt Release the brake pedal and accelerate Stop gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop gt Keep holding the brake
392. tch the rocker switch to the centre position 2 EI WARNING If you or a passenger have limited pain and or temperature sensitivity e g caused by medication paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes we recommend that you consult your physician before using the ventilated front seat l CAUTION a Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them a The fan is located underneath the front seat cushion Do not place any objects in this area it may damage the fan a Do not clean the seats using moisture page 195 Seat covers Note a The ventilation should only be switched on when the engine is running This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity a We do not recommend using the front seat ventilation and heating at the same time Using the ventilation to cool the seat surface considerably reduces the heating capacity at the same time affecting the ability of the control unit to de tect the right seat surface temperature Convenience features of passenger seat Fig 58 Operating passenger seat from the rear seat B3T 0639 AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 69 The front passenger seat can also be operated from the rear seat Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Push the switch A in the direction of one of the arrows 1 Fig 59 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Push the switch B in the direction
393. tem menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen navigation system If a voice command is not detected the system answers with Sorry and a new entry can be made After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid After the 3rd Failure is the answer Operation aborted and ends the dialogue Storing voice recording for a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book Voice tag Record menu item Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the Further op tions menu Voice commands GSM III AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 120 Basic voice commands Voice command Action HELP After this command the system repeats all possible commands After this command a name can be entered to es CAEL NAME tablish a connection with the requested party After this command a telephone number can be en DIAL NUMBER tered in order to establish a connection with the re quested party REDIAL The last selected telephone number is selected READ ADDRESSBOOK The system reads out contacts from the telephone book The system reads the messages which were re READ MESSAGES ceived while the telephone was connected to the control unit SHORT DIALOGUE The help is significantly reduced good operating knowledge provided Com
394. th the ISOFIX system AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 186 Overview of the usability of child seats with the ISOFIX system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard On the rear outside seats the fixing eyes are located below the upholstery The places are marked with labels with the ISOFIX logo Fig 162 EJ wAaRNING a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the ISOFIX system a Never attach other child seats belts or objects to the anchor eyelets inten ded for the installation of a child seat with the ISOFIX system risk to life Note a A child seat fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit ted with an ISOFIX system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve hicle Further information is available from a SKODA Partner a Child seats with the ISOFIX system can be purchased from KODA Original Ac cessories Size category 5 of the child seat Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle 0 to 10 kg E X IL SU X 0 E to 13 kg X IL SU X Transporting children safely 187 Pen ieee Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle IL SU IUF a The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat b If the front passenger seat is fitted with the ISOFIX system attac
395. the next service interval Fig 2 on page 8 A key symbol gt lt and the remaining distance appear in the display for 10 seconds The days remaining until the next service interval are displayed at the same time In vehicles equipped with the information display this display can be called up from the Settings menu page 27 The following message will be displayed in the information display for 10 seconds Oil change km days Inspection km days Note a Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle bat tery is disconnected a f the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair the correct values must be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display This work is carried out by a specialist garage For more information on the service intervals see Service schedule chap ter Service intervals Instruments and Indicator Lights 11 Digital clock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The clock is set with the buttons 3 and 7 Fig 2 on page 8 Select the display that you wish to change with the button 3 and carry out the change with the button 7 In vehicles equipped with the information display it is also possible to set the clock in the Time menu page 27 Display in rear centre console Fig 8 Centre console at rear Display First read and observe the introductory information and sa
396. the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched must be replaced this is best done by a specialist garage The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected The an chorage points for the belts should also be checked The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts 172 Safety The physical principle of a frontal collision A BNH 0133 Fig 150 Driver without a fastened seat belt rear passenger without a fas tened seat belt First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 171 Motion energy so called kinetic energy is produced as soon as the vehicle is moving both for the vehicle and its occupants The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the occupants The greater the speed and weight increase the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident The speed of the vehicle is the most important factor Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km h up to 50 km hour increases the kinetic energy four times The idea that it is possible to support your body with your hands in a minor acci dent is incorrect Even in a collision at only a low speed the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longe
397. the direction of the arrow 3 Adjusting lumbar support gt Push the lever D Fig 51 in the direction of one of the arrows4 66 Using the system Electric front seat adjustment B3T 0679 B3T 0680 Fig 53 Setting Seat pad backrest First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 65 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Push the switch B Fig 52 in the direction of one of the arrows 3 Fig 53 Set the height of the seat cushion gt Push the switch B Fig 52 in the direction of one of the arrows 5 Fig 53 Adjust the angle of the seat cushion gt Push the switch B Fig 52 in the direction of one of the arrows 4 Fig 53 Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Push the switch C Fig 52 in the direction of one of the arrows 6 Fig 53 Reducing or increasing the curvature of the lumbar support gt Push the switch A in the region of one of the arrows2 Fig 52 Raising or lowering the curvature of the lumbar support gt Push the switch A in the region of one of the arrows1 Fig 52 The adjusted driver s seat position can be set in the memory of the seat page 68 or the remote control key page 68 i Note If the setting procedure is interrupted you will need to press the button again Headrests Fig 54 Headrests adjust remove Fig 55 Rear centre head rests in vehi cles with the TOP TETHER sys tem Fi
398. the event that the windows are frozen first of all eliminate the ice page 192 De icing windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the electrical power windows Otherwise the window sealing and the electrical pow er window mechanism could be damaged a In the winter ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause there to be more resistance when closing the window The window will stop and move back several centimetres a It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the window page 43 a Make sure that the windows are closed whenever you leave the locked vehicle Unlocking and opening 41 SA For the sake of the environment At high speeds you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily high fuel consumption i Note The window lift system is equipped with protection against overheating Repea ted opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to overheat If this happens it will not be possible to operate the window for a short time You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the overheating protection has cooled down Opening closing the window from the driver seat Fig 26 Buttons on the driver s door B3T 0275 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 Opening gt The window is opened by pressing gently on the corresponding button The opening process stops when one releases the button The window
399. the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes nec essary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is de ployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated posi tion a After a certain time play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the backrest angle a For safety reasons it is not possible to store the seated position in the seat memory and remote control key memory if the inclination angle of the seat back rest is more than 102 in relation to the seat cushion a Each new driver seat and external mirror position that is saved will overwrite the existing setting Seats and useful equipment 65 Manually adjusting the front seats Fig 51 Controls setting First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 65 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Pull the lever A Fig 51 in the direction of the arrow 1 and push the seat in the required direction The lock must click into place after you release the lever Adjusting height of seat gt Again push pull the lever B Fig 51 in the direction of one of the arrows2 Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Relieve any pressure from the seat backrest do not lean on it and turn the handwheel C Fig 5lin
400. the illumination time can be activated deactivated via the information display in the menu items Coming Home or Leaving Home page 27 The light is regulated based on data gathered by the light sensor attached be tween the windscreen and the interior mirror page 50 The function switches on the parking and low beam lights the entry lighting in the exterior mirrors and the licence plate light COMING HOME The light turns on automatically when you open the driver s door on within 60 seconds of turning off the ignition The light turns off 10 seconds after closing all the doors and the tailgate or after the preset time If a door or the boot lid remains open the light goes out after 60 seconds LEAVING HOME The light turns on automatically after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control The light turns off after 10 seconds or after a preset time or after the vehicle is locked CAUTION Do not affix any stickers or similar objects in front of the light sensor on the wind screen so that its functionality is not impaired or disabled i Note If this function is activated constantly the battery will be heavily discharged par ticularly in short haul traffic Hazard warning light system Fig 35 Button for hazard warning light system a _ o First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 Switching on off gt Press the A Fig 35 button All t
401. the most fuel immediately after the start Fuel consump tion drops to 10 litres 100 km after just 1 kilometre The consumption stabilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating tempera ture An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature The im age Fig 132 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a cer tain distance at a temperature of 20 C and a temperature of 10 C The vehicle has a higher fuel consumption in winter than in summer Checking tyre inflation pressure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct If the inflation pressure is too low the tyres will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance This will not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will wor sen Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Avoiding unnecessary ballast First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 Transporting ballast costs fuel Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption Therefore we rec ommend to carry no unnecessary weight It is particularly in town traffic when one is accelerating quite often that the ve hicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption A rule
402. the updating starts anew GSM Il The internal phonebook provides 2 500 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 4 numbers On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system a maximum of 1 200 tel ephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500 the phone book is not complete GSM Ill The internal phonebook provides 2 000 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 5 numbers On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system a maximum of 1 000 tel ephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance If the mobile phone s telephone book has more than 2 000 contacts the follow ing message will appear in the information display Phone book not fully loaded CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system 109 Inserting the mobile phone and adapter 111 Managing telephone calls with the help of the adapter 111 Operate the telephone via the information display gt gt m 2 The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following functions gt Phone Phonebook page 109 gt Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering wheel page 107 gt Managing telephone calls via the adapter page 111 gt Operation of the telephone via the information display page
403. then is it possible to perform the activation Emergency equipment and self help 235 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Replacing the windscreen wiper blades gt z236 Replacing the rear window wiper blade 236 EI warnine Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons These can be purchased from a SKODA Partner Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Fig 199 Windscreen wiper blade First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 236 Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade put the windscreen wiper arms into the service position Service position for changing wiper blades gt Closing the bonnet gt Switch the ignition off and on again gt Within 10 seconds press the lever in position 4 and keep it held for around 2 seconds Fig 46 on page 60 The windscreen wiper arms move into the service position 236 Do it yourself Removing the wiper blade gt Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen gt Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism 1 Fig 199 gt Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 Attaching the wiper blade gt Push the windscreen wiper blade until the stop and it locks in place gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arms back to the windscreen gt Turn
404. ties include oil filter change Check the oil level when filling do not over fill The oil level must be between the markings page 206 EJ WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en gine compartment page 201 Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage a If the oil level is above level A Fig 168 on page 206 do not continue to drive Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage CAUTION Do not pour any additives into the engine oil risk of serious damage to the en gine parts Damage which results from such product are excluded from the war ranty Note a Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle a We recommend that you use oils from KODA Original Accessories a If your skin has come into contact with oil it must be washed thoroughly Specifications and capacity First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Diesel engines 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR Specification VW 507 00 Filling level 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel eng
405. til the engine starts gt Press the starter button Fig 123 on page 132 briefly the engine starts gt Release the handbrake Vehicles with manual transmission The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed The following message is shown in the information cluster display Depress clutch to start CLUTCH Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine will not start if the brake pedal is not depressed The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and the following mes sage appears in the display Apply the brake to start BRAKE Switching off the ignition First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 131 gt Briefly press the starter button Fig 123 on page 132 and the ignition is switch ed off The ignition can be switched off up to a speed of 2 km h On vehicles with manual transmission the clutch pedal must not be depressed to switch off the ignition otherwise the system will try to start On vehicles with automatic transmission the selector lever must be in position P or N and the brake pedal must not be depressed otherwise the system will try to start Switching off the engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 131 gt Stop the vehicle gt Switch off the engine by pressing the starter button Fig 123 on page 132 do ing so switches off the ignition at the sam
406. tion N e g from R to D This for example helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck e g in a bank of snow The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in position N for more than approx 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds up to 5 km h Note If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode D or vice versa move the selector lever quickly This prevents modes R or N from being accidentally se lected Manual gear changing Tiptronic Fig 129 Selector lever and multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 136 Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lever or multifunction steering wheel This mode can be selected both while stopping and while driving 138 Driving The currently selected gear is indicated in the instrument cluster display 1 Fig 127 on page 137 The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear page 22 Switching to manual shifting gt Push the selector lever to the right out of position D Shifting up gears gt Press the selector lever forwards Fig 129 gt Pull the right hand rocker switch Fig 129 briefly towards the steering wheel Shifting down gears gt Press the selector lever backwards Fig 129 gt Pull the left hand rocker swi
407. tion of rotation must be adhered to in order to ensure the op timal characteristics of these tyres These characteristics mainly relate to the following v Increased driving stability Z Reduced risk of aquaplaning Y Reduced tyre noise and tyre wear Tyre pressure monitor Fig 175 Button for setting the tyre infla tion pressure control value First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 System settings After changing the tyre inflation pressure after changing one or several wheels the position of a wheel on the vehicle e g exchanging the wheels between the axles or when the warning light lights up while driving a system configuration must be carried out as follows gt Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure page 215 gt Switch on the ignition gt Press and hold the symbol button i Fig 175 for longer than 2 seconds If the warning light lights up and does not go out after the system configura tion this indicates a system fault Seek help from a specialist garage If the warning light flashes there is a system fault Seek help from a specialist garage Tyre pressure indicator The warning light lights up in any of the following cases gt The tyre inflation pressure is low gt The structure of the tyre is damaged gt The vehicle is loaded on one side gt The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily e g when t
408. to be connected gt Select the appropriate Wi Fi network connection in the menu of the networks found e g Wi Fi SK_WLAN 1234 If menu item WPA2 is set in the Mobile phone Wi Fi Settings Encryption menu then the password displayed when the Wi Fi is switched on must be en tered in the device to be connected The password can be found in the Mobile phone Wi Fi Password Show menu If menu item Open is set in the Mobile phone Wi Fi Settings Encryption menu the connection is made automatically Connecting using WPS service for easy connection gt Switch on the Wi Fi network page 116 Switching Wi Fi network on off gt Open the Mobile phone Wi Fi WPS config menu in the instrument cluster gt In the device to be connected select the connection using WPS function see operating instructions for the device to be connected If the Pushbutton menu item is selected in the instrument cluster the Wi Fi con nection is made automatically If the WPS PIN menu item is selected in the instrument cluster then a PIN must be entered in the device to be connected and the instrument cluster Operating a Wi Fi network in the information display Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 116 When a Wi Fi network is switched on the following menu items are displayed when the Wi Fi menu item is selected Off Switch off the Wi Fi network depending on the context Device List Displa
409. tomatic driving lamp control AUTO only operates as a support and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light and if necessa ry to switch on the light depending on the given light conditions The light sensor cannot for example detect rain or snow Under these conditions we recommend switching on the low beam or fog lights i Note a f there is a fault in the light switch the low beam comes on automatically a The headlights may mist up temporarily When the driving lights are switched on the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period although the headlight lenses may still be misted up in the peripheral areas This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system Parking and low beam lights Fig 31 Light switches knobs for head light beam adjustment and in strument illumination B3T 0610 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 The light switch also controls the fog lights page 52 the rear fog light page 52 and the parking light page 54 The light switch A or the control dials B and or C is used to operate the fol lowing functions Fig 31 O 1 WW O ITA Switching on the parking light or parking lights on both sides Switching on the low beam Switching off lights except daytime running lights Headlight beam adjustment Adjust brightness of the instrument lighting Ns Q KN
410. traffic conditions permit this Do not place any other road users in jeopardy CAUTION When driving through water some parts of the vehicle such as the engine gearbox chassis or electrics can be severely damaged a Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle a Potholes mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or im possible to drive through the body of water Do not drive through salt water The salt can lead to corrosion Any vehicle parts that have come into contact with salt water must be rinsed immediately with fresh water i Note After driving through water we recommend having the vehicle checked by a spe cialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unleaded petrol 145 Headlights 146 In certain countries it may be possible that the SKODA Partner network is limited or has not been established This is the reason why procuring certain spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be able to make limited repairs Unleaded petrol Co First read and observe the introductory information given on page 145 A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded pet rol page 200 Unleaded petrol Information regarding the locations of filling sta tions that offer unleaded petrol is for example provided by the automobile asso
411. traffic lights The engine restarts automatically where necessary The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met JY The driver s door is closed The driver has fastened the seat belt The bonnet is closed The driving speed was higher than 4 km h after the last stop No trailer is coupled S SSS EI warnine a The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run ning a Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off CAUTION Always deactivate the START STOP system before driving through wa ter page 145 Note a f the driver s seat belt is removed for more than approx 30 seconds or the driv er s door is opened during stop mode on vehicles with manual transmission or au tomatic transmission when the selector lever in position P the engine must be started manually page 131 a After manually starting the engine on vehicles with manual transmission auto matic engine shut down is not possible until the vehicle has travelled the re quired minimum distance for START STOP mode a If on vehicles with automatic transmission the selector lever positions D S or N are selected after driving in reverse the vehicle will first need to achieve a speed of over 10 km h before automatic engine shut down can take place again a Changes to the outdoor temperature can have an effect on the internal temper ature of the vehicle battery even after several hours If the vehicle r
412. ts Driving abroad 146 Headlight cleaning system 61 Replacing a bulb 241 Headrest 67 Heater Windscreen and rear window 58 Heating External mirrors 64 Seats 69 HHC 149 Hill Hold Control HHC 149 Horn 7 Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA 149 Ignition see Ignition lock 130 Ignition lock 130 Immobiliser 130 Individual settings Lock 32 Unlock 32 Inertia reels 174 Information display see MAXI DOT 26 Information message see KESSY 34 Instrument cluster 8 Display 10 Overview 8 Interior monitor 36 Internet connection T16 ISOFIX 187 J Jack 222 Jacking points Raise vehicle 225 Jump starting 229 K KESSY Information message 34 Lock 34 Starting the engine 133 Switching off the engine 133 Switching off the ignition 133 Switching on the ignition 133 Unlock 34 Unlocking locking the steering 132 Key Starting the engine 130 Switching off the engine 131 Knee airbag 179 L LEAVING HOME 52 Lever Main beam 50 Turn signal 50 Windscreen wipers 60 Light Bulb replacement 241 Light bulbs Rear light Superb Combi 244 Lighting Boot 82 Lights 48 Adaptive headlights AFS 51 Automatic driving lamp control 50 Cockpit 54 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME 52 Dayl dri lights 49 Fog lights 52 Fog lights with the CORNER function 52 Hazard warning light system 53
413. ttery are housed in the housing of the remote control The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle When the battery is fully charged the range of the remote control is a few hun dred metres Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle bad weather conditions and a weaker battery in the remote control can clearly reduce the range To switch the auxiliary heating aux heating on or off hold the remote control vertical with the aerial A pointing upwards The antenna must not be covered with the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process The auxiliary heating can only be switched on off safely using the radio remote control if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m After pressing the button the warning light in the remote control gives the user different kinds of feedback Display warning light B Fig 112 Importance Lights up green for around 2 seconds The auxiliary heating was switched on Lights up red for around 2 seconds The auxiliary heating aux heating is switched off Slowly flashes green for around 2 sec onds The ignition signal was not received Quickly flashes green for around 2 sec onds The auxiliary heating aux heating is blocked e g because the tank is near ly empty or there is a fault in the auxili ary heating aux heating Flashes red for around 2 seconds The switch off signal was not
414. tuations gt When driving on poorly maintained roads and paths gt When driving over kerbs gt When driving on steep ramps etc Particular attention must be paid with vehicles with sport suspension and when the vehicle is fully laden a Driving through water ROMBE Driving through water AR First read and observe the introductory information given on page 144 The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided when driving through water e g flooded roads gt Determine the depth of the water before driving through The water level must not reach above the bar on the lower beam Fig 133 gt Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed At a higher speed a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the engine s air induction system or other parts of the ve hicle gt Never stop in the water do not reverse and do not switch the engine off gt Deactivate the START STOP system before driving through water page 156 START STOP EJ warnine a Driving through water mud sludge etc can impair the braking power and increase the braking distance risk of accident a Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings After driving through bodies of water the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking Only apply the brakes for the pur pose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the
415. ually fold in electric exterior mirrors always use the electric controls Washing with a high pressure cleaner First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 189 When washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner the instructions for use of the equipment must be observed This applies in particular to the pressure used and to the spraying distance Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material E WARNING Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters l CAUTION a f washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high pressure cleaner en sure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the door panel joints risk of freezing a To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high pressure cleaners or steam jets the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short periods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed a The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 C risk of damaging the vehicle a See also Washing cars with decorative films using a high pressure clean er page 192 190 General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Taking care of your vehicle s paintwork CSS Plastic parts 191 Rubber seals 191 Chrome parts 98 Decorativ
416. ulate filter In order to clean the diesel particulate filter and where traffic conditions per mit H the vehicle should be driven at an even speed of at least 60 km h at en gine speeds of 1 800 2 500 rpm for at least 15 minutes or until the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged automatic gearbox position S when the traffic situation permits it The indicator light only goes out after the diesel particulate filter has been successfully cleaned If the filter is not properly cleaned the indicator light does not go out and the indicator light o gt begins to flash The following message appears in the information display Diesel particulate filter Owner s manual The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode After switching the ignition off and on again the indicator light the indicator light also lights up Seek help from a specialist garage EJ WARNING a The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures Therefore do not park in areas where the hot filter can come into direct contact with dry grass or other combustible materials there is the risk of fire a Always adjust your speed to suit weather road region and traffic condi tions The recommendations indicated by the indicator light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic CAUTION As long as the indicator light lights up one must take into account an in crea
417. until the in ner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap Fig 177 gt Remove the cap Install gt Push the caps onto the wheel bolts up to the stop The wheel bolt caps are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the stor age space for the spare wheel Hubcaps Fig 178 Pull off the wheel trim cap on light alloy wheels First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 Pulling off gt Carefully remove the wheel trim cap using the wire clamp from the vehicle tool kit Fig 178 Wheels 219 Wheel bolts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 214 Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design Each time you fit other wheels rims e g light alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres you must also use the matching wheel bolts with the correct length and dome shape This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that the brake system operates properly CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Winter tyres 220 Snow chains 220 Winter tyres AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 220 Fitting winter tyres will significantly improve the handling of your vehicle when driving in wintry road conditions Summer tyres have less grip on ice snow and at temperatures below 7 C This is especia
418. ur vehicle should as far possible never be used Fuel consumption pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at high speeds The Fig 131 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle Fuel consumption will be halved if you drive at only three quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle Reducing idling First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 Idling also costs fuel In vehicles not equipped with the START STOP system turn off the engine when in a traffic jam at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times Even after just 30 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up again 142 Driving If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating temperature Wear and tear and pollutant emissions though are particularly high in the warming up phase Therefore start driving as soon as the engine has Started whereby high engine speeds should be avoided Avoiding short distances 1 100km Fig 132 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in 1 100 km at different tem peratures First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 Short distances result in an above average high fuel consumption We therefore recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold A cold engine consumes
419. ust be kept closed a The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle risk of im pairment to the functions of the anti theft alarm system CAUTION Do not put any heat sensitive objects in the glasses storage box they may be damaged Storage compartment on the passenger side Fig 76 Tray open operating air supply First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 73 A pen holder is provided in the stowage compartment Opening gt Press the button Fig 76 A The flap folds down Closing gt Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place Air supply gt Open the air supply by pulling the lever in the direction of the arrow Fig 76 B gt The air supply is closed by pressing the lever in the opposite direction to that of the arrow Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows cooled air to flow into the storage compartment Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or inte rior air to flow into the storage compartment We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the cool ing system for the storage compartment is not being used FJ wAaRNING The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea sons When the stowage compartment is opened a light lights up Storage compartment under the passenger
420. ven at temperatures around 4 C black ice may still be on the road surface warning drive with care i Note a In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of meas ures a f the display of the second speed is activated in mph the current speed is not indicated in km h on the display a The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated Select Information B3T 0667 Fig 10 Buttons adjustment wheel on the operating lever multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 Select information in the Segment Display gt Briefly press the rocker switch A up or down Fig 10 1 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litre 2 On some models in certain countries km ltr is displayed when the vehicle is stationary Select information in the information display gt From the main menu of the information display choose the menu MFD page 26 gt Briefly press the rocker switch A up or down Fig 10 or gt Turn the adjustment wheel D upwards or downwards Fig 10 Information overview First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 22 Outside temperature The current outside temperature is shown in the display If the outside temperature drops below 4 C a snow flake symbol warning sig nal for ice on the road appears before t
421. ving Information messages First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 156 The messages and information are indicated in the instrument cluster display Start the engine manually START MANUALLY The driver sees this message when the conditions for the automatic start proce dure are not met during the STOP phase The engine must be started manual ly page 133 Error Start Stop ERROR START STOP Error in the START STOP system Seek help from a specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation SID Information messages 159 FI WARNING a For the driving ability is always the driver s responsibility Never drive if you feel tired The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed Therefore take regular sufficient breaks during long trips There will be no system warning during the so called micro sleep Note a In some situations the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus mistakenly recommend a break e g sporty driving adverse weather conditions or poor road conditions The fatigue detection system is designed primarily for motorway driving Operation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 158 The fatigue detection system advises the driver on the basis of information about the steering behaviour to take a break fr
422. vironment It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness Fuel consumption environmental pollution and the wear to the engine brakes and tyres depend essentially on the following three factors gt your personal driving style gt operating conditions gt technical requirements The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 15 by always looking ahead and driving in an economical way Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond the driver s control Consumption increases during the winter or under difficult condi tions on poor roads etc Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer s data as a result of outside temperatures the weather and driving style The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating in order to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle l CAUTION All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature Looking ahead First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 140 A vehicle s highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating therefore unnec essary accelerating and braking should be avoided If looking ahead when driving less braking and consequently less accelerating are required If possible let your vehicle coas
423. warn ings H on page 147 If the wheels are slipping the TCS adapts the engine speed to the conditions of the road surface The TCS makes it much easier to start off accelerate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable The TCS function is activated automatically each time the ignition is switched on If your vehicle is fitted with the ESC system the ASR is integrated into the ESC system page 147 During an intervention of the system the TCS indicator light flashes in the in strument cluster 148 Driving The TCS should normally always be switched on The system should be deactiva ted only in the following situations for example gt When driving with snow chains gt When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface gt When rocking a car free when it has become stuck The ASR can be deactivated via the symbol button 48 Fig 135 The warning light amp lights up in the instrument cluster when the ASR is deactiva ted Ensure the TCS is activated again afterwards Electronic Differential Lock EDL First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 147 If one of the wheels starts to spin the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel and transfers the driving force to the other wheels This ensures the stability of the vehicle and a quick journey The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation in
424. will also open fully automatically if you briefly press the button as far as the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immedi ately Closing gt The window is closed by pulling gently on the corresponding upper edge of the button The closing process stops when one releases the button 42 Using the system The window will also close fully automatically if you briefly pull the button as far as the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immedi ately Buttons for the power windows Fig 26 A Button for power window of the driver s door Button for power window of the front passenger door Button for power window of the rear right door D Button for power window at the rear left door S Safety pushbutton Safety pushbutton The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by pressing the safety pushbutton S Fig 26 The buttons for the electrical power windows in the rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton S again If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated the indicator light amp in the safe ty switch S lights up Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors Fig 27 Arrangement of the button on the rear door B3T 0477 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 41 There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that wi
425. witched on a The KESSY system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine while driving this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergen cy page 134 a The steering is not unlocked or locked if the starter button is repeatedly press ed at short intervals 132 Driving Unlocking and locking the steering KESSY HOMS Starter button L B3T 0366 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 131 Unlocking gt Open the driver s door and get into the vehicle gt Close the driver s door The steering is unlocked within 2 seconds Locking gt Stop the vehicle gt Switch off the engine or the ignition by pressing the starter button Fig 123 gt Open the driver door The steering is locked If the driver s door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards the steering is only locked after the vehicle is locked If the steering is locked and the KESSY system does not manage to unlock the steering lock the first time e g if the wheels are resting against the curb the at tempt will be repeated twice by the system If the steering lock is then not unlocked the following information is shown in the instrument cluster display Move the steering wheel MOVE STEERING WHEEL Slightly move the steering and the system will complete 3 more attempts to un lock after 2 seconds At the same time the indicator light flashes
426. ximum per missible towed weight must be reduced by 10 The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing device is merely a test value for the towing device The vehicle specific values are detailed in the vehicle documents E WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the maximum permissible total or towed weight of the vehicle and the trailer risk of accident and serious injury Slipping loads can significantly impair the stability and safety of the vehicle trailer combination risk of accident and serious injury Driving with a trailer m a Fig 147 Swivel out the 13 pin power socket y Sy B5E 0230 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 163 gt Before attaching the trailer to the vehicle take hold of the 13 pin power socket in the area A Fig 147 and swivel it out in the direction of the arrow gt Remove the protective cover 5 5 Fig 142 on page 160 upwards before con necting the trailer to the vehicle Safety eyelet The purpose of the safety eyelet B Fig 147 is to attach the breakaway cable of the trailer 164 Driving When attaching the breakaway cable to the safety eyelet it must sag freely against the vehicle in all trailer positions sharp bends in reverse etc E
427. xt channel Skip to next track Skip to next chapter No function Stop traffic announcement Press and hold but ton No function Fast forward No function Press briefly Switch to previous channel Switch to previous channel Switch to start of track Switch to previous chapter No function Stop traffic announcement Press and hold but ton No function Fast rewind No function Turn upwards Switch to previous channel and display List of stored accessible channels Skip to next channel Skip to next track Skip to next chapter 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 Turn downwards Switch to the next channel and display List of stored accessible channels Switch to previous channel Switch to start of track Switch to previous chapter Show the option to stop navigation or display the list of recent destina tions gt Press briefly Call up the main menu 4 To go to the previous track press the adjustment wheel twice or rotate it by two positions For a description of use refer to the operating instructions for the relevant radio or navigation system AUX IN and MDI inputs AA First read and observe the introductory information given on page 124 The AUX IN and MDI inputs are used to connect external audio sources e g iPod or mp3 player and to play back music from these devices via the factory fitted
428. xterior mirrors You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear view mirrors The national legal requirements must be observed Headlights The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer is being towed and the head lights may dazzle other road users Adjust the headlights using the headlight beam control page 48 Parking and low beam lights Driving speed For safety reasons do not drive faster than 80 km h when towing a trailer Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the trail er is detected Never attempt to stop the trailer from swaying by accelerating Brakes Apply the brakes in good time If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake apply the brakes gently at first then brake firmly This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a brake Engine overheating If the needle for the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right hand area or the red area of the scale the speed must be reduced immediately Stop and switch off the engine if the indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant page 208 Check ing the coolant level The following guidelines must be observed page 15 Coolant temperature coolant level The coolant
429. y a list of external devices Active device Display a list of active devices Block Block device connections Known devices Display a list of known devices Rename Rename the device Block Block device connections Device blocked Display a list of blocked devices Unblock Remove the connection block Delete lists Delete device lists Known devices Delete the list of known devices Device blocked Delete the list of blocked devices Both lists Delete both device lists Password Use of password to log on to the Wi Fi network Show Display a password to log on to the Wi Fi network Generate Generate a new password to log on to the Wi Fi network Wi Fi name Use of Wi Fi network name Show Display the Wi Fi network name Rename Rename the Wi Fi network WPS config Wi Fi network connection using WPS Pushbutton Automatic connection WPS PIN PIN entry for the connection Data counter Display information about the volume of data transferred Current conn Display the volume of data transferred for the current connec tion Total Display the total volume of data transferred Reset Reset the information about the volume of data transferred Communication and multimedia 117 Settings Wi Fi network settings Access point Access point settings Settings Access point management APN Change the access point name User name User Name Password Password Reset Reset
430. y offer you optimal protection in combination with a fas tened seat belt a The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt but instead forms part of the complete passive vehicle safety concept TO ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed the front seats must be correctly adjusted to match the body size page 168 Correct seated position a f you do not fasten the seat belts when driving lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident EI wARNING Observe the following instructions for handling the airbag system a f there is a fault the airbag system must be checked by a specialist garage immediately Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system a Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of sys tem components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage a Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork a It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed a The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one acci dent The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has be
431. your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off SA For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as soon as the engine has started Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower Electronic immobiliser First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 129 An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key The immobiliser is deacti vated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is with drawn from the lock The engine will not start if a non authorized ignition key is used The following message is shown in the information cluster display Immobilizer active 130 Driving Ignition lock Fig 122 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 129 Petrol engines Fig 122 1 Ignition switched off engine off the steering can be locked 2 Ignition switched on 3 Starting engine Diesel engines Fig 122 1 Fuel supply interrupted ignition switched off engine switc
432. yre inflator bottle into the tyre gt Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve gt Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 Inflating gt Screw the tyre inflation hose 5 Fig 186 on page 226 of the air compressor firmly onto the tyre valve gt Check that the air release valve 7 is closed gt Start the engine and run it in idle gt Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket page 76 Cigarette lighter gt Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 gt Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved Max imum run time of 8 minutes F gt Switch off the air compressor gt If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar unscrew the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve gt Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre gt Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process gt If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either this means the tyre has sustained too much damage You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit H gt Switch off the air compressor gt Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve Once a tyre pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved continue the journey at a maxi mum speed of 80 km h Check the tyre inflation pressure after
433. ystem Description of the airbag system Airbag overview Deactivating airbags Transporting children safely Child seat Fastening systems General Maintenance Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle Washing your vehicle Taking care of your vehicle exterior Taking care of the interior Modifications repairs and technical alterations Table of Contents 147 147 149 151 155 156 158 160 160 163 167 167 168 171 171 174 176 176 177 181 184 184 186 189 189 190 194 196 Inspecting and replenishing 199 Fuel YS Engine compartment 201 Engine oil 204 Coolant SS 207 Brake fluid 208 Vehicle battery 209 Wheels 214 Tyres and wheel rims 214 Winter operation 220 Emergency equipment and self help 221 Emergency equipment 221 Changing a wheel 222 Tyre repair 226 Jump starting 228 Towing the vehicle 230 Radio remote control 232 Emergency unlocking locking 233 Emergency operation of the sliding tilting roof _ 235 Replacing windscreen wiper blades 236 Fuses and light bulbs 237 Fuses 237 Bulbs 241 Technical data 245 Vehicle data o o o o 245 4 Table of Contents Access Point Name the name of an access point for the WiFi network COz in g km discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilo meter i steer ferent the transmission of voic

&Scaron;KODA Superb Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents